This Molex product is manufactured from material that has the following ratings, tested by independent agencies:. a) A Glow Wire Ignition Temperature (GWIT) of at least 775 deg C per IEC 60695-2-13.. b) A Glow Wire Flammability Index (GWFI) above 850 deg C per IEC 60695-2-12.and hence complies with the requirements set out in the International Standard IEC 60335-1 5th edition - household and similar electrical appliances - safety, section 30 Resistance to heat and fire.

The customers using this product must determine its suitability for use in their particular application through testing or other acceptable means as described in end-product glow-wire flammability test standard IEC 60695-2-11 and any applicable product end-use standard(s).

If it is determined during the customer’s evaluation of suitability, that higher performance is required, please contact Molex for possible product options." Overview Sabre™ Power Connector Product Literature Order No 987650-5662 Product Name Sabre™ UPC 800754378185 Physical Breakaway No Circuits (Loaded) 2 Circuits (maximum) 2 Color - Resin Black Durability (mating cycles max) 25 First Mate / Last Break No Flammability 94V-0 Glow-Wire Compliant Yes Guide to Mating Part No Keying to Mating Part Yes Series image - Reference only EU RoHS China RoHS ELV and RoHS Compliant REACH SVHC Contains SVHC: No Low-Halogen Status Not Low-Halogen Need more information on product environmental compliance? Email productcompliance@molex.com For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of Compliance, click here Please visit the Contact Us section for any non-product compliance questions. Search Parts in this Series 43160Series Mates With 44441-2002 Sabre™ Receptacle Housing Lock to Mating Part Yes Material - Metal Brass Material - Plating Mating Tin Material - Plating Termination Tin Material - Resin High Temperature Thermoplastic Net Weight 3.331/g Number of Rows 1 Orientation Right Angle PC Tail Length 3.81mm PCB Locator Yes PCB Retention Yes PCB Thickness - Recommended 1.60mm Packaging Type Tray Pitch - Mating Interface 7.50mm Pitch - Termination Interface 7.50mm Plating min - Mating 0.889μm Plating min - Termination 0.889μm Polarized to Mating Part Yes Polarized to PCB Yes Shrouded Fully Stackable No Surface Mount Compatible (SMC) No Temperature Range - Operating -40°C to +75°C Termination Interface: Style Through Hole Electrical Current - Maximum per Contact 18A Voltage - Maximum 600V Solder Process Data Duration at Max. Process Temperature (seconds) 5 Lead-free Process Capability Wave Capable (TH only) Max. Cycles at Max. Process Temperature 1 Process Temperature max. C 235 Material Info Reference - Drawing Numbers Product Specification PSX-44441-9999 Sales Drawing SDA-43160-**** This document was generated on 01/08/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION This document was generated on 01/06/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION Part Number: 39-00-0038 Status: Active Overview: Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors Description: Mini-Fit® Female Crimp Terminal, Tin (Sn) over Copper (Cu) Plated Brass, 18-24 AWG, Reel Documents: Drawing (PDF) Product Specification PS-52034-003 (PDF) Product Specification PS-51010-005 (PDF) Product Specification PS-52034-004 (PDF) Product Specification PS-51010-006 (PDF) Product Specification PS-5556-001 (PDF) Product Specification PS-51045-001 (PDF) Product Specification PS-5556-002 (PDF) Product Specification PS-51045-002 (PDF) Packaging Specification PK-5556-001 (PDF) Product Specification PS-51045-004 (PDF) Test Summary TS-5556-002 (PDF) Product Specification PS-51096-001 (PDF) RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF) General Product Family Crimp Terminals Series 5556 Application Power Crimp Quality Equipment Yes Overview Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors Packaging Alternative 39-00-0039 (Loose) Product Name Mini-Fit® UPC 800753585010 Physical Durability (mating cycles max) 30 Gender Receptacle Material - Metal Brass Material - Plating Mating Tin Material - Plating Termination Tin Net Weight 0.130/g Packaging Type Reel Plating min - Mating 0.889μm Plating min - Termination 0.889μm Termination Interface: Style Crimp or Compression Wire Insulation Diameter 1.30-3.10mm Wire Size AWG 18, 20, 22, 24 Wire Size mm² N/A Electrical Current - Maximum per Contact 9A Voltage - Maximum 600V Material Info Old Part Number 5556T Reference - Drawing Numbers Packaging Specification PK-5556-001 Product Specification PS-51010-005, PS-51010-006, PS-51045-001, PS-51045-002, PS-51045-004, PS-51096-001, PS-52034-003, PS-52034-004, PS-5556-001, PS-5556-002, RPS-30067-001, RPS-30067-002, RPS-42474-001, RPS-51045-001, RPS-5557-008, RPS-5557-024, RPS-5557-031, RPS-5557-036, RPS-5557-037, RPS-5557-045, RPS-5557-046, RPS-5566-002 Series image - Reference only EU RoHS China RoHS ELV and RoHS Compliant REACH SVHC Contains SVHC: No Low-Halogen Status Low-Halogen Need more information on product environmental compliance? Email productcompliance@molex.com For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of Compliance, click here Please visit the Contact Us section for any non-product compliance questions. Search Parts in this Series 5556Series Mates With 5558 Mini-Fit® Crimp Male Terminals. Mini- Fit Jr.™ Header, Dual Row, 5566 , 5569 Use With 5557 Mini-Fit Jr.™ Receptacle Housing, 30067 Mini-Fit® TPA, 42474 Mini-Fit® BMI Panel Mount, 5559 Mini-Fit Jr.™ Plug Housing, Dual Row Application Tooling | FAQ Tooling specifications and manuals are found by selecting the products below. Crimp Height Specifications are then contained in the Application Tooling Specification document. Global Description Product # FineAdjust™ Applicator for Insulation OD 0639023900 Sales Drawing SD-5556**** Test Summary TS-5556-002 1.40-1.70mm - 18-24 AWG Extraction Tool 0011030044 Hand Crimp Tool for Male and Female Crimp Terminals, 16-24 AWG Wire 0638190900 FineAdjust™ Applicator for Insulation OD 2.50-2.95mm - 18-24 AWG 0639002600 FineAdjust™ Applicator for Insulation OD 1.65-2.05mm - 18-24 AWG 0639002900 FineAdjust™ Applicator for Insulation OD 1.90-2.30mm - 18-24 AWG 0639015600 FineAdjust™ Applicator for Insulation OD 2.50-2.95mm Optimized for 18 AWG Only 0639024800 FineAdjust™ Applicator for Insulation OD 2.30-2.60mm - 18-24 AWG 0639024900 T2 Terminator™ for insulation OD 2.50-2.95mm - 18-24 AWG 0639102600 T2 Terminator™ for insulation OD 1.65 – 2.05mm – 18 – 24 AWG 0639102900 T2 Terminator™ for insulation OD 1.90-2.30mm - 18-24 AWG 0639115600 T2 Terminator™ for insulation OD 1.40-1.70mm - 18-24 AWG 0639123900 T2 Terminator™ for insulation OD 2.50-2.95mm optimized for 18 AWG only 0639124800 T2 Terminator™ for insulation OD 2.30-2.60mm - 18-24 AWG 0639124900 Japan Description Product # Applicator for M211A Bench Press, 18-24 AWG Wire 0570223000 Side-Feed Applicator For Full-Auto Machine 0570223200 Hand Extraction Tool 0570316000 This document was generated on 01/06/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION For more complete information on any product, please visit our web site: www.aimtti.com Measurably better value manual & bus programmable - Laboratory Power Supplies Mixed-mode Regulation Mixed-mode regulation with linear output stage 4 digit voltage and current meters on each output * Constant voltage or constant current operation Variable auxiliary output (1.5-5V@5A) on triple model Switched remote sensing (not EX355P or EX752M) Silent fan-free cooling ** DC output switches        Compact bench power supplies Single, dual or triple outputs Mixed-mode regulation Power from 175W to 420W Switched remote sense terminals RS-232 interface model available       EX-R series Model Outputs Voltage / Current Power Interfaces EX355R One 0 to 35V / 0 to 5A 175W - EX355P One 0 to 35V / 0 to 5A 175W RS232 EX355P-USB One 0 to 35V / 0 to 5A 175W USB EX1810R One 0 to 18V / 0 to 10A 180W - EX2020R One 0 to 20V / 0 to 20A 400W - EX4210R One 0 to 42V / 0 to 10A 420W - EX354RD Two 2 x (0 to 35V / 0 to 4A) 280W - EX354RT Three 2 x (0 to 35V / 0 to 4A) plus 1.5 to 5.0V @ 5A 305W EX752M Two 2 x (0 to 75V / 0 to 2A) or 0 to 75V / 0 to 4A or 0 to 150V / 0 to 2A 300W Brief specifications for main outputs: Line & load regulation: <0.01%. Output noise: < 2mV rms. Meter accuracies: voltage - 0.3% ± 1digit, current - 0.6% ± 1digit. Sizes: singles - 140 x 160 x 295mm; dual/triple - 260 x 160 x 295mm (WxHxD) The EX752M is a dual output 300 watt PSU with Multi-Mode capability. This enables it to operate as a dual power supply with two independent and isolated outputs, or as a single power supply of double the power.  As a dual, each output provides 0 to 75V at 0 to 2A (mode A). As a single, the output can be selected as either 0 to 75V at 0 to 4A (mode B) or 0 to 150V at 0 to 2A (mode C). In single modes, the unused half of the unit becomes completely inoperative and its displays are blanked. For those requiring a basic bus controllable power supply, versions with an RS-232 interface (EL302P) or a USB interface (EL302P-USB) are available.  The EX series is the value-for-money PSU for users who require higher power levels. Mixed-mode regulation gives excellent performance combined with compact size and low weight. Dual output and triple output models are available in a similar casing style. The EX354RT triple (illustrated) has a variable voltage auxiliary output which can be set using the digital displays.  ** Note that the EX2020R and EX4210R use fan assisted cooling. All-linear regulation becomes impractical at higher power levels, so Aim-TTi have developed a technology that combines HF switch-mode pre-regulation with linear final regulation. This technique combines exceptional efficiency with noise levels that are close to that of pure linears. Mixed-mode regulation is used in the EX-R and TSX series. * Note that 3 digit current meters are used on the EX355P and EX752M and that voltmeter resolution on the EX752M is 0.1V. * Note that a 3 digit current meters is used on the EL302P & EL302P-USB, and that these models do not have remote sense terminals. http://www.farnell.com/datasheets/1796748.pdf SS-331 LCD Desoldering Station User’s Manual 1st Edition, ©2014 Copyright by Prokit’s Industries Co., Ltd. 1 Description SS‐331 designed for lead free desoldering especially. The quick heating and strong power are for convenient and clear soldering / desoldering all types of DIP components. Reasonable structure, single hand operation and strong absorbing power can be easy removal of the residual solder from the one‐sided or two sided of the PCB. This tool is used in the fields of electronic research, teaching and production, especially in the repairing and desoldering on the electronic appliances and communication equipments. 1. Control Unit The desoldering iron gun is controlled automatically by the micro‐processor. The digital control electronics and high‐quality sensor and heat exchange system guarantee precise temperature control at the soldering tip. The highest degree of temperature precision and optimal dynamic thermal behavior under load conditions is obtained by the quick and accurate recording of the measured values in a closed control circuit, and this design is especially for the lead‐free production techniques. 2. Desoldering Iron gun Desoldering iron gun with a power of 60W（Heat up rating 130W）and a wide spectrum of soldering tips can be used anywhere in the electronics field. The high power and gun type design make this iron gun suitable for fine desoldering work. The heating element is made of ceramic and the sensor on the desoldering tip can control the desoldering temperature quickly and accurately. 2 Technical Specification Voltage 220~240V AC Power Consumption 140W Temperature 160°C ~ 480°C Vacuum Pressure 600mm Hg Heating Element Ceramic Heater Accessories Spare tip x 3 ( 0.8(on the gun)1.0/  1.3mm) Cleaning tool x 3 (0.7/0.9/ 1.2mm) Filter sponge x 4 (φ20.8x1 +φ16.8x3) Certificate CE, GS, RoHS Station Size (mm) 225 x 160 x 130 Weight (kgs) 2.5 Operating Instruction Caution：Make sure that the four screws which are used to fasten the Diaphragm pump are removed from the control system before use. Otherwise serious damages may be caused to the user and the system. 1. Place the desoldering iron gun in the holder separately. Then connect the plug to the receptacle on the station and turn clockwise to tighten the plug nut. Check that the power supply is corresponding to the specification on the type plate and the power switch is on the “OFF” position. Connect the control unit to the power supply and switch on the power. Then a self‐test is carried out in which all display elements are switched on briefly. The electronic system then switches on automatically to the set temperature and displays this value. 2. The display and temperature setting ①. Shows the actual temperature of the desoldering tip. ②. Shows the setting temperature: Pressing the “UP” or “DOWN” button can switch the digital display to the set point display. The set‐point can be changed for ±1℃ by tapping the “UP” or “DOWN” button. Pressing the button will change the set‐point quickly. The digital display will return automatically to the actual value and the iron will reach to the setting temperature quickly. ③. ℃/℉ display: Switching the temperature display from ℃ to ℉ by pressing the “℃/℉”button and then the electronic system will display the actual temperature① and setting temperature② in ℉, and vice versa. ④. When the actual temperature on the soldering tip is less than the set‐point, “HEAT ON” will display and make the desoldering tip heating up. ⑤. When the absolute offset is more than ±10℃ between the actual temperature and the set‐point on the soldering tip or the nozzle, “WAIT” will display. It means that the temperature electronic control system is not in the stable situation, we should wait a moment to let the “WAIT” disappear. ⑥. When “ERROR” display, there may be a trouble on the 3 4 Safety Instruction 1. The manufacturer assumes no liability for uses other than those described in the operating instructions or for unauthorized alterations. 2. The operating instructions and cautions should be read carefully and kept in an easily visible location in the vicinity of the control system. Non‐observance of the cautions will result in accidents, injury or risks to health. Caution 1. The power cord only can be inserted in approved power sockets or adapters. 2. High Temperature The temperature of the soldering tip will reach as high as around 400℃（752℉） when the power switch is on. Since mishandling may lead to burns and fire, be sure to comply with the following precautions: ①. Do not touch metallic parts near the soldering tip/ nozzle. ②. Do not use this system near the flammable items. ③. Advise other people in the work area that the unit can reach a very high temperature and should be considered potentially dangerous. ④. Turn off the power switch while taking breaks and when finishing using. ⑤. Before replacing parts or storing the system, turn off the power and let it cool down to the room temperature. ⑥. Warning: this tool must be placed on its stand when not in use. 5 ⑦. A fire may result if the appliance is not used with care, therefore: 1) Be careful when using the appliance in places where there is combustible material. 2) Do not apply to the same place for a long time. 3) Do not use in presence of an explosive atmosphere. 4) Be aware heat may be conducted to combustible materials that out of sight. 5) Place the appliance on its stand after use and allow it to cool down before storage. 6) Do not leave the appliance unattended when it is switched on. 3. Take care of your tools Do not use the tools for any applications other than soldering or desoldering. Do not rap the iron against the work bench or otherwise subject the iron to severe shocks. Do not file the soldering tip to remove the oxide, please wipe the tip on the cleaning sponge. Use only accessories or attachments which are listed in the operation manual. Use of other tools and other accessories can lead to a danger of injury. Please turn off the power before connecting or disconnecting the soldering iron. 4. Maintenance Before further use, safety devices or slightly damaged parts must be carefully checked for error‐free and intended operation. Inspect moving parts for error‐free operation and that they don’t bind, or whether any parts are damaged. Damaged safety devices and parts must be repaired or replaced by a qualified technician, so long as nothing else is indicated in the operation manual. Use only accessories or 6 attachments which are listed in the operation manual. Use of other tools and other accessories can lead to a danger of injury. 5. Keep children at a distance Warning: this appliance is not intended for use by young children and infirm persons unless they have been adequately supervised by a responsible person to ensure that they can use the appliance safely. Warning: Young children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. Unused soldering tools should be stored in a dry location which is out of the reach of children. Switch off all unused soldering tools. 6. Protect yourself against electrical shocks Avoid touching grounded parts with your body, e.g. pipes, heating radiators and so on. The grip of antistatic designed soldering tool is conductive. 7. Work environment Do not use the soldering tool in a moist or wet environment. The soldering iron should be placed on the holder after finished using. 8. Observe the valid safety regulations at your work place. SS-331數顯吸焊台 概述 SS-331 特別為無鉛吸焊而設計。快速升溫和大功率的特點使其可以方便快速的焊接/拆焊所有類型的DIP元器件。 合理的結構，單手操作和強大的吸焊功率能夠輕鬆的從PCB一面或兩面除去殘餘錫渣。 目前已廣泛的應用於電子科研，教學以及生產等單位，特別是家電維修和通訊器材維修人員所不可缺少的首選專用工具。 1. 控制單元 吸焊槍由微處理器自動控制。數位控制裝置和高品質的感測器及加熱交換系統保證對烙鐵頭的溫度進行精確的控制。通過快速準確的記錄閉和控制回路測量可以獲得作高的溫度精度和帶負載狀況下最佳熱量轉遞性能，特別適合用於無鉛制程工藝。 2. 吸焊槍 (5SS-331-DG) 吸焊槍的功率為 60W（額定加熱功率 130W），可以配各種尺寸的烙鐵頭（U系列），廣泛應用於電子領域。 大功率和細長外形設計使這個電烙鐵適合做精密的焊接操作，發熱芯採用陶瓷發熱材料製作，頂端溫度感測器設計其特點在於能夠快速並準確的控制焊接溫度。 7 技術規範. 電壓 220~240V AC 消耗功率 140W 溫度 160°C ~ 480°C 真空吸力 600mm Hg 發熱原件 陶磁發熱芯 配件 吸嘴 x 3(0.8(裝在吸槍上)1.0/  1.3mm) 通針 x 3( 0.7/  0.9/  1.2mm) 過濾棉 x 4 ( 20.8mm x1 +  16.8mm x3) 認證 CE, GS, RoHS 尺寸(mm) 225 x 160 x 130 重量(kgs ) 2.5 操作說明： 1 將吸焊槍放置在支架上。然後將插頭插入插座順時針方向鎖緊螺母。檢查供電電源符合本產品的規格並確認總電源開關處於OFF的位置。接通控制系統的電源並打開電源開關。系統進行自檢，所有的液晶顯示都暫時被點亮。電子系統自動打開並迅速達到設定的溫度值。 2 顯示幕和溫度設置： 數位顯示說明： ① . 顯示吸焊烙鐵頭的實際溫度。 8 9 ② . 顯示的是設定溫度，通過按“UP＂或“DOWN＂鍵來改變設定值。輕壓單下“UP＂或“DOWN＂鍵設定值將以±1℃變化，持續按下“UP＂或“DOWN＂鍵設定值將會快速改變。改變設定值後，電子系統自動工作，顯示溫度會迅速到達設定值。 ③ . ℃或℉溫度，通過按“℃/℉＂按鈕切換攝氏或華氏溫度，切換後電子系統會自動顯示的攝氏或華氏實際溫度①和設定溫度②數值。 ④ . 當烙鐵頭實際溫度小於設定溫度時顯示“HEAT ON＂表示電子系統對烙鐵正在加熱。 ⑤ . 當烙鐵頭實際溫度與設定溫度的絕對偏差大於±10℃時顯示“WAIT＂，表示電子控溫系統還沒到達穩定狀態，請稍做等待，待“WAIT＂不顯示時即可正常使用了。 ⑥ . 顯示“---＂則表示系統有故障，或者是電烙鐵沒有正確連接到控制系統。 3 安全操作說明 3.1 製造商對於超出操作說明中所到的其他使用或未經授權的更改，不負任何責任。 3.2 應仔細閱讀操作說明及警告並將其放置在控制系統附近，如不遵守這些警告，將有可能發生意外事故，人體傷害或健康傷害。 4 警告及注意事項 4.1 電源線只能插入經認證過的電源插座或適配器中。 4.2 小心高溫:在開機狀態下，烙鐵頭或熱風槍焊嘴的溫度可以達到大約400℃（752℉）左右，由於不正確的操作可能會造成燒傷或引起火災，故應確保遵守以下預防措施：  不要讓金屬部件接觸到焊嘴和烙鐵頭；  不要在易燃物品附近使用該系統；  告知工作區域中的其他人員此設備會達到非常高的溫度應注意識別其潛在的危險性；  在休息及使用完後應關閉總電源  在更換零件或儲存前，應關閉總電源並讓其冷卻到 10 室溫  警告：不用時一定要將此工具放置在特定的支架上。  如使用不當可能會引起火災，因此  在有易燃物品的場所使用該設備一定要小心；  不要長時間在同一位置使用該設備；  不要在有爆炸性氣體的場所使用；  要知道熱量有可能會引燃不在視線範圍內的可燃物質；  使用完畢後要將器具放置在特定的支架上，且要在冷卻後方可收藏起來;  離開時必須要關閉電源開關。 4.3 愛護工具  不要將此設備用於焊接或脫焊以外的其他操作。  不要在工作臺上敲打電烙鐵或熱風筒或其他嚴重的撞擊。  不要銼烙鐵頭上的氧化層，請使用浸水的清潔棉擦除氧化層。  確保使用操作說明上列明的附件或配件，使用其他的工具或其他配件使本系統損壞或會有受傷的危險。  在接通或斷開錫槍前應先關閉電源。 4.4 工具保養 在使用前，應仔細檢查安全裝置或有輕微損害的零件無故障及在指定操作狀態。檢查活動的零件無故障操作，並且沒有繞線及零件損壞。已損壞的安全設備及零件都應由有資格的專業人員進行維修或更換。只使用操作說明中列出的配件。如果使用其他工具或配件有可能對操作人員造成傷害。 4.5 放置在兒童接觸不到的地方 警告：老人和兒童必須在監護人在場確保可安全使用的情況下方可使用該設備。警告：應確保兒童在沒有監護的情況下無法接觸到該設 備。 4.6 不用的焊接工具應存放在乾燥的，兒童接觸不到的地方。而且應該關閉所有未在使用狀態下的焊接工具的電源。 4.7 避免遭受電擊 避免用身體接觸接地零件，如：烙鐵管，散熱器等。抗靜電設計的焊接工具的把手是導電的。 4.8 工作環境 不要在潮濕的環境中使用焊接工具。電烙鐵及熱風槍用完後要放回到支架上。 4.9 遵守工作場所中的安全操作規定。 寶工實業股份有限公司 PROKIT’S INDUSTRIES CO., LTD. http://www.prokits.com.tw E-mail:pk@mail.prokits.com.tw ©2014 Prokit’s Industries Co., LTD. All rights reserved 2014001(C) Connections to a Wider Range of Slaves Ensured by Upgraded Models Master Conventional models New models C200HW-SRM21 CQM1-SRM21 SRM1-C01 SRM1-C02 SRM1-C01-V1 SRM1-C02-V1 3G8B3-SRM00 3G8B3-SRM01 C200PC-ISA02-SRM C200PC-ISA12-SRM C200HW-SRM21-V1 CQM1-SRM21-V1 SRM1-C01-V2 SRM1-C02-V2 NKE-made Uniwire C B /SS d Communications mode Slave ade U e CompoBus/S Send Unit SDD-CS1 High-speed communications mode Long-distance communications mode SRT1 Series FND-X􀀀-SRT Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Products from other companies SMC Solenoid valve for SI manifold use VQ Series SX Series SY Series Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No CKD Solenoid valve for saving wiring effort 4TB1 and 4TB2 Series 4TB3 and 4TB4 Series 4G Series MN4SO Series Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Koganei Valve for saving wiring effort YS1A1, A2 YS2A1, A2 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No New product SRT2-AD02 SRT2-DA02 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes SRT2-VID08S(-1) SRT2-VOD08S(-1) SRT2-VID16ML(-1) SRT2-VOD16ML(-1) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SRT2-ID16(-1) SRT2-OD16(-1) SRT2-ID08(-1) SRT2-OD08(-1) SRT2-ROC16 SRT2-ROF16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes CPM1A-SRT21 Yes Yes Yes Products to be released soon SRT2-ID04(-1) SRT2-OD04(-1) SRT2-ID16T(-1) SRT2-OD16T(-1) SRT2-MD16T(-1) SRT2-ROC08 SRT2-ROF08 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note: 1. In high-speed communications mode, the maximum transmission distance is 100 m at a baud rate of 750 kbps. In long-distance communications mode (i.e., a newly available mode), the maximum transmission distance is 500 m at a baud rate of 93.75 kbps. 2. The SRT2-AD04 and SRT2-DA02 are available for 16-bit synchronous communications. 11 Master Control Unit SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 Subminiature, Stand-alone Model with CompoBus/S Master and SYSMAC Controller Functions Maximum number of Remote I/O points per Master: 256 Maximum number of Slaves per Master: 32 Communications cycle time: 0.5 ms max. (at baud rate 750 kbps). Communications distance: Extended to 500 m max. (at baud rate 93.75 kbps). Additional instructions (PID, SCL, NEG, ZCP) ensure analog compatibility. RS-232C port incorporated (SRM1-C02-V2). RC Ordering Information Specifications Model Buuilt-in sstaandd-aaloonee ccoontroolleer fuuncctioonss Without RS-232C SRM1-C01-V2 With RS-232C SRM1-C02-V2 Specifications Master Specifications Number of I/O points 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs) 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs) Selectable by DM setting. The default setting is 256 points. Max. number of Slaves per Master 256 points: 32 128 points: 16 I/O words Input words: 000 to 007 Output words: 010 to 017 Programming language Ladder diagram Types of instruction 14 basic and 72 special instructions (123 instructions in total) Execution time LD instruction: 0.97 ms MOV instruction: 9.1 ms Program capacity 4,096 words Data memory 2,048 + 512 (read-only) words Timers/Counters 128 timers/counters Work bits 640 bits Memory backup Flash memory (without battery): User programs Super capacitor: Data memory (backed up for 20 days at an ambient temperature of 25°C) Peripheral port 1 point RS-232C port 1 point (SRM1-C02-V1 only) Host Link, NT Link, 1:1 Link, or no protocol Programming tool Programming Consoles: CQM1-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E SYSMAC-CPT: WS01-CPTB1-E (CD-ROM/FD) SYSMAC Support Software (MS-DOS version): C500-ZL3AT1-E Note: PID, SCL, NEG, and ZCP instructions are not supported by the SYSMAC-CPT. SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 12 Communications Specifications Communications method CompoBus/S protocol Coding method Manchester coding method Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note 1) Communications baud rate 750,000 bps/93,750 bps (see note 2) Communications cycle time High-speed comm nications 0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs communications mode 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Long-distance comm nications 4.0 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs communications mode 6.0 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20) Dedicated flat cable Communications distance High-speed communications mode VCTF cable: Main line length: 100 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 50 m max. Flat cable: Main line length: 30 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 30 m max. (When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.) Long-distance communications mode VCTF cable: Main line length: 500 m max. Branch line length: 6 m max. Total branch line length: 120 m max. Max. number of connecting nodes 32 Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check Note: 1. A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master. 2. The communications baud rate is switched using DM settings (default setting is 750,000 bps). General Specifications Supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC Power consumption 3.5 W max. Inrush current 12.0 A max. Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes each (Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 minutes) Shock resistance 147 m/s2 three times each in X, Y, and Z directions Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C Storage: –20°C to 75°C Humidity 10% to 90% (with no condensation) Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gas. Terminal screw size M3 Power interrupt time DC type: 2 ms min. Weight 150 g max. SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 SRM1-C01-V2/C02-V2 13 Nomenclature SRM1-C01-V2 SRM1-C02-V2 CPU Unit status indicator CompoBus/S communications status indicator Indicates the status of the Compo- Bus/S in operation and in communication with Slaves. Peripheral port communications status indicator Flashes when the peripheral port or RS-232C port is in communication. Connector cover Peripheral port Connect this port to programming tools through dedicated cables. Terminal block Connector cover RS-232C port Connect this port to the RS-232C interfaces of personal computers and Programmable Terminals. Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRM1-C01/C02-V2 The above dimensions apply to the SRM1-C02-V2. The SRM-C01-V2 has no RS-232C port. 14 Master Unit C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS1, C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS A maximum of 256 I/O points available. Connects to a maximum of 32 Slaves. Communications cycle time: 0.5 ms max. (at baud rate 750 kbps). Communications distance: Extended to 500 m max. (at baud rate 93.75 kbps). Connection to Analog Terminals now supported. RC Ordering Information PC Max. number of I/O points Model C200HX (-Z), C200HG (-Z), C200HE (-Z), C200HS, CS1 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs) C200HW-SRM21-V1 Specifications Communications Specifications Communications method CompoBus/S protocol Coding method Manchester coding method Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note 1) Communications baud rate 750,000 bps, 93,750 bps (see note 2) Communications cycle time High-speed comm nications 0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs communications mode 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Long-distance comm nications 4.0 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs communications mode 6.0 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20) Dedicated flat cable Communications distance High-speed communications mode VCTF cable: Main line length: 100 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 50 m max. Flat cable: Main line length: 30 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 30 m max. (When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.) Long-distance communications mode VCTF cable: Main line length: 500 m max. Branch line length: 6 m max. Total branch line length: 120 m max. Max. number of connecting nodes 32 Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check Note: 1. A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master. 2. The communications baud rate is switched with the DIP switch. C200HW-SRM21-V1 C200HW-SRM21-V1 15 Unit Specifications Current consumption 150 mA max. at 5 VDC Number of I/O points 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs), 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs) (switchable) Number of occupied words 256 points: 20 words (8 input words/8 output words, 4 status data) 128 points: 10 words (4 input words/4 output words, 2 status data) PC CS1, C200HX (-ZE), C200HG (-ZE), C200HE (-ZE), C200HS Number of points per node number 8 points Max. number of Slaves per Master 32 Status data Communications Error Flag and Active Slave Node (see note) Weight 200 g max. Approved standards UL 508 (E95399), CSA C22.2 No. 142 (LR51460) Note: These flags use the AR area. Ratings The ratings of the Unit are the same as those of the CS1, C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS. Nomenclature Indicators Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit and the status of communications with the Slaves. Rotary Switch This switch sets the Master’s one-digit hexadecimal unit number. DIP Switch These pins have the following functions: Pin 1: Max. number of Slaves setting Pin 2: Baud rate setting Pins 3 to 4: Reserved (Always OFF.) Communications Terminals Connect the Slaves’ transmission cable to these terminals. C200HW-SRM21-V1 C200HW-SRM21-V1 16 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. C200HW-SRM21-V1 Note: Refer to the C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, C200HS, or CS1 Operation Manual for details on the dimensions when the Master Unit is installed in the PC’s Backplane. Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. 17 Master Unit CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 A maximum of 128 I/O points available (Possible to set 32, 64, or 128 I/O points). Connects to a maximum of 16/32 Slaves. Communications cycle time: 0.5 ms max. (at baud rate 750 kbps). Communications distance: Extended to 500 m max. (at baud rate 93.75 kbps). Connection to Analog Terminals now supported. RC Ordering Information PC Max. number of I/O points Model CQM1-series PC 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs) CQM1-SRM21-V1 Specifications Communications Specifications Communications method CompoBus/S protocol Coding method Manchester coding method Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note 1) Communications baud rate 750,000 bps, 93,750 bps (see note 2) Communications cycle time High-speed comm nications 0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs communications mode 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Long-distance comm nications 4.0 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs communications mode 6.0 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20) Dedicated flat cable Communications distance High-speed communications mode VCTF cable: Main line length: 100 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 50 m max. Flat cable: Main line length: 30 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 30 m max. (When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.) Long-distance communications mode VCTF cable:: Main line length: 500 m max. Branch line length: 6 m max. Total branch line length: 120 m max. Max. number of connecting nodes 32 Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check Note: 1. A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master. 2. The communications baud rate is switched with the DIP switch. CQM1-SRM21-V1 CQM1-SRM21-V1 18 Unit Specifications Current consumption 180 mA max. at 5 VDC Number of I/O points 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs), 64 points (32 inputs/32 outputs), 32 points (16 inputs/16 outputs) (switchable) Number of occupied words 128 points: 4 input words/4 output words 64 points: 2 input words/2 output words 32 points: 1 input word/1 output word PC 128 points: CQM1-CPU41-EV1/CPU42-EV1/CPU43-EV1/CPU44-EV1 64 points: CQM1-CPU11-E/CPU21-E/CPU41-EV1/CPU42-EV1/CPU43-EV1/CPU44-EV1 32 points: CQM1-CPU11-E/CPU21-E/CPU41-EV1/CPU42-EV1/CPU43-EV1/CPU44-EV1 Number of points per node number 4/8 points (switchable) Max. number of Slaves per Master 32 (4 points per node number) Status data Alarm terminal output Weight 200 g max. Approved standards UL 508 (E95399), CSA C22.2 No. 142 (LR51460) Alarm Output Specifications Maximum switching capacity 2 A at 24 VDC Minimum switching capacity 10 mA at 5 VDC Relay G6D-1A Minimum ON time 100 ms Circuit configuration 2 A at 24 VDC max. Internal circuit CQM1-SRM21-V1 Ratings The ratings of the Unit are the same as those for the CQM1. Nomenclature Indicators Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit and the status of communications with the Slaves. DIP Switch These pins have the following functions: Pins 1 and 2: PC word allocation setting Pin 3: Number of points setting Pin 4: Baud rate setting Pins 5 to 6: Reserved (Always OFF.) Alarm Output Terminals These terminals are shorted when an error occurs. Connect to a warning device. Communications Terminals Connect the Slaves’ transmission cable to these terminals. Terminal block screws These screws attach the terminal block. The terminal block can be removed when these screws are loosened. CQM1-SRM21-V1 CQM1-SRM21-V1 19 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. CQM1-SRM21-V1 Note: Refer to the CQM1 Operation Manual for details on the dimensions when the Master Unit is installed in the PC’s Backplane. Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. 20 SYSMAC Board C200PC-ISA􀀀2-SRM SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE and CompoBus/S Master Functions Integrated into a Single PCB Operates as a Programmable Controller to be built into personal computers. Programming is possible through Programming Devices like the programming on C200HX/HG. An optional Expansion Board is available for serial communications. Dedicated library in C is available for control. Driver for Windows use is available. Connects to a maximum of three Expansion I/O Racks. CompoBus/S Slave data is automatically read. Ordering Information PC Max. number of I/O points Model C200HG-CPU43 256 points ( 128 inputs/128 outputs) C200PC-ISA02-SRM C200HX-CPU64 56 o s 8 u s/ 8 ou u s) C200PC-ISA12-SRM Specifications Communications Specifications Communications method CompoBus/S protocol Coding method Manchester coding method Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method (see note) Communications baud rate 750,000 bps Communications cycle time 0.5 ms with 8 Slaves for inputs and 8 Slaves for outputs 0.8 ms with 16 Slaves for inputs and 16 Slaves for outputs Communications cable 2-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 x 20) Dedicated flat cable Communications distance VCTF cable: Main line length: 100 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 50 m max. Flat cable: Main line length: 30 m max. Branch line length: 3 m max. Total branch line length: 30 m max. (When flat cable is used to connect fewer than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch line length can be up to 50 m.) Max. number of connecting nodes 32 Error control checks Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check Note: A terminator must be connected to the point in the system farthest from the Master. C200PC-ISA􀀀2-SRM C200PC-ISA􀀀2-SRM 21 Unit Specifications Power supply voltage 4.875 to 5.25 VDC Current consumption 0.5 A max. (see note 1) Number of I/O points 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs), 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs), (switchable) Number of occupied words 256 points: 20 words (8 input words, 8 output words, and 4 status data words) (see note 2) 128 points: 10 words (4 input words, 4 output words, and 2 status data words) Number of points per node number 8 points Max. number of Slaves per Master 32 Status data Communications Error Flag and Active Slave Node (see note 2) Weight 200 g max. Note: 1. The current consumption will be 0.8 A max. if the Programming Console is connected through the optional Expansion Board. 2. The occupied words are in the IR area. 22 I/O Link Unit CPM1A-SRT21 I/O Link Unit for CPM2A/CPM1A Operates as a Slave of the CompoBus/S Master Unit. Exchanges eight inputs and eight outputs with the Master. Approved by UL and CSA standards, and bears the CE marking. RC Ordering Information CPU Units I/O configuration Power supply Output method Input Output Model 30-point I/O model AC Relay 18 12 CPM1A-30CDR-A* DC Relay CPM1A-30CDR-D* Transistor (sink) CPM1A-30CDT-D Transistor (source) CPM1A-30CDT1-D AC Relay CPM2A-30CDR-A DC Relay CPM2A-30CDR-D Transistor (sink) CPM2A-30CDT-D Transistor (source) CPM2A-30CDT1-D 40-point I/O model AC Relay 24 16 CPM1A-40CDR-A* DC Relay CPM1A-40CDR-D* Transistor (sink) CPM1A-40CDT-D Transistor (source) CPM1A-40CDT1-D AC Relay CPM2A-40CDR-A DC Relay CPM2A-40CDR-D Transistor (sink) CPM2A-40CDT-D Transistor (source) CPM2A-40CDT1-D 60-point I/O model AC Relay 36 24 CPM2A-60CDR-A DC Relay CPM2A-60CDR-D Transistor (sink) CPM2A-60CDT-D Transistor (source) CPM2A-60CDT1-D Note: Models marked with asterisks do not bear CE markings. Expansion Units Product Number of connectable Units per CPU Unit Output method Input Output Model Expansion I/O Units 3 max. (see note) Relay 12 8 CPM1A-20EDR1 Transistor (sink) CPM1A-20EDT Transistor (source) CPM1A-20EDT1 --- 8 --- CPM1A-8ED Relay --- 8 CPM1A-8ER Transistor (sink) --- 8 CPM1A-8ET Transistor (source) CPM1A-8ET1 Analog I/O Unit 3 max. (see note) Analog 2 1 CPM1A-MAD01 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit 3 max. (see note) --- 8 I/O link points 8 I/O link points CPM1A-SRT21 Note: Only a single Unit will be connectable if the NT-AL001 is connected to the RS-232C port. CPM1A-SRT21 CPM1A-SRT21 23 Specifications Slave CompoBus/S Slave Number of I/O points 8 inputs and 8 outputs Number of occupied I/O memory words of CPM2A 1 input word and 1 output word (same as other Expansion Units in allocation) Node address setting DIP switch Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. CPM1A-SRT21 Installation Connection Examples CompoBus/S Master Unit or SRM1 CompoBus/S Master Control Unit CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit CPM1A-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit CS1􀀀 C200H􀀀 CQM1 SRM1 Dedicated flat cable or VCTF cable Connectable to 16 Units max. (Eight CQM1-SRM21 Units max.) Note: A single CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit together with a maximum of two other Expansion I/O Units can be connected to the CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit. 24 Transistor Remote Terminal SRT
-ID/OD Long-distance Communications Supported by SRT2 Models (Long-distance/High-speed Communications Selection) SRT1 models support high-speed communications only. SRT2 models support long-distance communications and high-speed communications. Ultra-compact at 80 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D) mm for 4-point and 8-point terminals and 105 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D) mm for 16-point terminals. Two independent power supplies can be used because the I/O terminals are insulated from the internal circuits. DIN track mounting and screw mounting are both supported. RC Ordering Information I/O classification Internal I/O circuit common I/O points Rated voltage I/O rated voltage Model Input NPN (+ common) 4 24 VDC 24 VDC SRT1-ID04 PNP (– common) C C SRT1-ID04-1 Output NPN (– common) SRT1-OD04 PNP (+ common) SRT1-OD04-1 Input NPN (+ common) 8 SRT2-ID08 PNP (– common) SRT2-ID08-1 Output NPN (– common) SRT2-OD08 PNP (+ common) SRT2-OD08-1 Input NPN (+ common) 16 SRT2-ID16 PNP (– common) 6 SRT2-ID16-1 Output NPN (– common) SRT2-OD16 PNP (+ common) SRT2-OD16-1 Note: For more details about connections supported by the Master Unit, refer to page 10. Specifications Ratings Inputs Input current 6 mA max./point ON delay time 1.5 ms max. OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. ON voltage 15 VDC min. between each input terminal and V OFF voltage 5 VDC max. between each input terminal and V OFF current 1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Input indicators LED (yellow) SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 25 Outputs Rated output current 0.3 A/point Residual voltage 0.6 V max. Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Output indicators LED (yellow) Characteristics Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC I/O power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15% I/O power supply current 1 A max. Current consumption (see note) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Connecting Units 4-point and 8-point Terminals: 16 Input Terminals and 16 Output Terminals per Master 16-point Terminals: 8 Input Terminals and 8 Output Terminals per Master Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits) Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2 Destruction: 300 m/s2 Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions Terminal strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s Screw tightening torque 0.6 to 1.18 N 􀀀 m Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight 4-point and 8-point Terminals: 80 g max. 16-point Terminals: 110 g max. Approved standards (4/8 points) UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14 Note: The above current consumption is the value with all 4 and 8 and 16 points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output Remote Terminal. SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 26 Nomenclature I/O Terminals I/O Power Supply Terminals Connect 24-VDC power supply Communications Power Supply Terminals Connect 14- to 26.4-VDC power supply. CompoBus/S Terminal Connect the CompoBus/S DIP Switch communications cable. Used for node number setting and holding or clearing outputs for communications error. Refer to the Compobus/S Operation Manual (W266) for details on DIP switch settings. Baud rate setting 0 to 7 ERR COMM PWR Node Number Settings Output HOLD/CLEAR settings (Output Terminals only) Screw mounting hole Indicators Indicator Display Color Meaning PWR Lit Green The communications power supply is ON. Not lit The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Lit Yellow Normal communications Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Lit Red A communications error has occurred. Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. 0 to 7 Lit Yellow The corresponding I/O signal is ON. Not lit The corresponding I/O signal is OFF. Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode Mode Pin 1 Setting HOLD ON Output status is maintained. CLEAR OFF Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs. Note: 1. Pin 1 is factory-set to OFF. 2. This function is available to Output Terminals only. SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 27 Node Number Settings Node number Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 8 4 2 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF ON ON ON 8 ON OFF OFF OFF 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 ON OFF ON OFF 11 ON OFF ON ON 12 ON ON OFF OFF 13 ON ON OFF ON 14 ON ON ON OFF 15 ON ON ON ON Note: 1. The node number is factory-set to 0. 2. For node number settings, refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266). Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT1-ID04 (-1) SRT1-OD04 (-1) SRT2-ID08 (-1) SRT2-OD08 (-1) (54) 27 80 48 65 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Sixteen, M3 Mounting Holes (20.5) (11) SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 28 SRT2-ID16 (-1) SRT2-OD16 (-1) 48 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 (50) (28) Mounting Holes (54) 27 50 (20.5) (11) 105 22–M3 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT1-ID04 SRT1-ID04-1 Photocoupler Photocoupler Internal circuit Internal circuit 24 VDC(+) Photocoupler Photocoupler (–) SRT1-OD04 Internal circuit 24 VDC Photocoupler Photocoupler Voltage stepdown SRT1-OD04-1 Internal circuit Photocoupler Photocoupler 24 VDC (P) (P) 24 VDC (P) (P) Voltage stepdown V V V 1 G 0 2 G G V V V 1 V 0 2 G SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 29 SRT2-OD08-1 Internal circuit Photocoupler Photocoupler SRT2-ID08 SRT2-ID08-1 Photocoupler Photocoupler Internal circuit 24 VDC(+) Internal circuit Photocoupler Photocoupler (–) SRT2-OD08 Internal circuit 24 VDC Photocoupler Photocoupler Voltage stepdown SRT2-ID16 Photocoupler Internal Photocoupler circuit SRT2-ID16-1 Internal circuit Photocoupler Photocoupler Internal circuit SRT2-OD16 Photocoupler Photocoupler Voltage stepdown SRT2-OD16-1 Internal circuit Photocoupler Photocoupler Voltage stepdown 24 VDC (P) 24 VDC (P) (P) Voltage stepdown (P) 24 VDC (P) (P) 24 VDC (P) (P) V V 1 0 2 G G V V 1 0 2 G V V 1 0 2 G SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 30 External Connections (NPN Models) Input Sensor 1 Blue Brown Black Sensor 2 Blue Brown Black Sensor 1 Blue Brown Black Sensor 2 Blue Brown Black Three-wired Sensors SRT1-ID04 with NPN Output SRT2-ID08 and SRT2-ID16 with NPN Output Two-wired Sensors SRT1-ID04 SRT2-ID08 and SRT2-ID16 Sensor 1 Blue Brown Sensor 2 Blue Brown Sensor 1 Blue Brown Sensor 2 Blue Brown Output SRT1-OD04 SRT2-OD08 and SRT2-ID16 L 1 L 2 L 1 L 2 Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example (PNP Models) Note: The connections examples shown are for PNP models. Input SRT1-ID04 SRT2-ID08 Output SRT1-OD04 SRT2-OD08 Blue Brown Blue Brown Blue Brown Brown Blue Communications path Communications power supply power supply power supply Communications path Communications power supply Communications path Communications power supply power supply Photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor (threewired sensor with a builtin- amplifier) Limit switch (two-wired sensor) Solenoid, valve Solenoid I/O Communications path Communications power supply Photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor (threewired sensor with a builtin- amplifier) Limit switch (two-wired sensor) Black Black SRT2-ID16 SRT2-OD16 Communications path Communications power supply I/O power supply Photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor (threewired sensor with a builtin- amplifier) Limit switch (two-wired sensor) I/O power supply Communications path Communications power supply Solenoid Valve Valve power supply I/O Blue Brown Blue Brown Black I/O I/O SRT
-ID/OD SRT
-ID/OD 31 External Connections (PNP Models) Input Three-wired Sensors SRT1-ID04-1 with NPN Output SRT2-ID08-1 and SRT2-ID16-1 with NPN Output Two-wired Sensors SRT1-ID04-1 SRT2-ID08-1 and SRT2-ID16-1 Sensor 1 Blue Brown Black Sensor 2 Blue Brown Black Sensor 1 Blue Brown Black Sensor 2 Blue Brown Black Sensor 1 Blue Brown Sensor 2 Blue Brown Sensor 1 Blue Brown Sensor 2 Blue Brown Output SRT1-OD04-1 SRT2-OD08-1 and SRT2-ID16-1 L 1 L 2 L 1 L 2 Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example (PNP Models) Note: The connections examples shown are for NPN models. Input SRT1-ID04-1 SRT2-ID08-1 Output SRT1-OD04-1 SRT2-OD08-1 Blue Brown Blue Brown Blue Brown Brown Blue Communications path Communications power supply power supply power supply Communications path Communications power supply Communications path Communications power supply power supply Photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor (three-wired sensor with a built-in-amplifier) Limit switch (two-wired sensor) Solenoid, valve Solenoid I/O Communications path Communications power supply Photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor (three-wired sensor with a built-in-amplifier) Limit switch (two-wired sensor) Black Black SRT2-ID16-1 SRT2-OD16-1 Communications path Communications power supply I/O power supply Photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor (three-wired sensor with a built-in-amplifier) Limit switch (two-wired sensor) I/O power supply Communications path Communications power Valve supply Solenoid Valve power supply I/O Blue Brown Blue Brown Black I/O I/O Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. For general precautions refer to page 80. 32 Remote I/O Terminal SRT1-
D16T(-1) Models with 3-tier Terminals (16 Points) are Added to the Remote I/O Terminal Series. Six Models are Available Depending on the NPN or PNP Configuration, Input Points, I/O Points, or Output Points. Incorporates easy-to-wire terminals each connecting to a single wire. Reduces designing and wiring effort. Incorporates a removable circuit block of cassette construction. Ordering Information I/O classification Internal I/O circuit common I/O points I/O connection method Model Digital input NPN (+ common) 16 M3 terminal block SRT1-ID16T PNP (– common) 6 3 e a boc SRT1-ID16T-1 Digital I/O NPN (+ common) SRT1-MD16T PNP (– common) SRT1-MD16T-1 Digital output NPN (– common) SRT1-OD16T PNP (+ common) SRT1-OD16T-1 Specifications Ratings Inputs Input current 6 mA max./point at 24 V and 3 mA min./point at 17 V ON delay time 1.5 ms max. OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. ON voltage NPN: 15 VDC min. between V terminals and each input terminal PNP: 15 VDC min. between G terminals and each input terminal OFF voltage NPN: 5 VDC max. between V terminals and each input terminal PNP: 5 VDC max. between G terminals and each input terminal OFF current 1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Outputs Rated output current 0.5 A max./point Residual voltage 1.2 V max. ON delay time 0.5 ms max. OFF delay time 1.0 ms max. Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler SRT1-
D16T(-1) SRT1-
D16T(-1) 33 Characteristics Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC I/O power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15% I/O power supply current 4 A max./common Current consumption (see note) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Dielectric strength 500 VAC between insulated circuits Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2 Shock resistance 200 m/s2 Mounting strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied in all directions. Terminal strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied Screw tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 N 􀀀 m Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C Storage: –25°C to 65°C Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation) Weight 300 g max. Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output Remote Terminal. Nomenclature ERR Indicator: Indicates communications errors. COMM Indicator: ON while the Unit is in data communication. Power Indicator HOLD/CLR DIP Switch The DIP switch is on the left-hand side under the cover on the upper part of the Remote I/O Terminal. Holding or clearing output when a communications error occurs. Address Setting Switch Set the rotary switch to the node address by referring to the following table. I/O Indicators M4 Mounting Screw Terminal Cover The Unit stops operating with the cover opened. I/O and I/O Device Power Supply Terminals 8 to 15 These terminals will be used as output terminals 0 through 7 if the connected device handles both input and output signals. I/O and I/O Device Power Supply Terminals 0 to 7 These terminals will be used as input terminals if the connected device handles both input and output signals. I/O Power Supply Terminals Connect 24-VDC I/O power supply Fixture Track Used for DIN track mounting. CompoBus/S Internal Power Supply Terminals (BS+ and BS–) CompoBus/S Communications Cable Terminals (BDH and BDL) Address Setting Switch Node address Setting (Hex) 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Node address Setting (Hex) 8 8 9 9 10 A 11 B 12 C 13 D 14 E 15 F SRT1-
D16T(-1) SRT1-
D16T(-1) 34 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT1-ID16T (-1) SRT1-MD16T (-1) SRT1-OD16T (-1) Mounting Holes Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT1-ID16T SRT1-MD16T SRT1-ID16T-1 SRT1-MD16T-1 SRT1-OD16T SRT1-OD16T-1 DC-DC converter (isolated type) Photocoupler Photocoupler Inputs (0 to 7) Inputs (8 to 15) DC-DC converter (isolated type) Photocoupler Photocoupler Inputs (0 to 7) Inputs (0 to 7) DC-DC converter (isolated type) Photocoupler Photocoupler Inputs (0 to 7) Inputs (8 to 15) DC-DC converter (isolated type) Photocoupler Photocoupler Inputs (0 to 7) Inputs (8 to 15) DC-DC converter (isolated type) Photocoupler Photocoupler Inputs (0 to 7) Outputs (0 to 7) DC-DC converter (isolated type) Photocoupler Photocoupler Outputs (0 to 7) Outputs (8 to 15) I/O power supply I/O power supply I/O power supply Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Voltage drop Voltage drop Voltage drop Voltage drop Voltage drop Voltage drop SRT1-
D16T(-1) SRT1-
D16T(-1) 35 External Connections Input (NPN Models) SRT1-ID16T SRT1-MD16T Output (NPN Models) SRT1-OD16T SRT1-MD16T Input (PNP Models) SRT1-ID16T-1 SRT1-MD16T-1 Output (PNP Models) SRT1-OD16T-1 SRT1-MD16T-1 Two-wired sensor Three-wired sensor Three-wired sensor Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. Blue (Black) Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) Black (Black) Blue (Red) Brown (White) 36 Relay-mounted Remote Terminal SRT
-R Ultra-miniature 8-point and 16-point Relay-mounted Terminals Ultra-compact (8-point models: 101 x 51 x 51 mm (W x H x D); 16-point models: 156 x 51 x 51 mm (W x H x D)) Power MOS FET Relay and Relay models. DIN track mounting and screw mounting are available. RC Ordering Information Classification I/O points Rated voltage Relay coil rating Model Applicable relay Relay output 8 points 24 VDC 24 VDC SRT1-ROC08 G6D-1A 16 points SRT2-ROC16 Power MOS FET l t t o e OS 8 points SRT1-ROF08 G3DZ-2R6PL relay output 16 points SRT2-ROF16 Note: For details about connections to the Master Unit, refer to page 10. Specifications Ratings Relay Output Item SRT1-ROC08, SRT2-ROC16 Applicable relay G6D-1A (one for each output point) Rated load 3 A at 250 VAC, 3 A at 30 VDC (resistive load) Rated carry current 3 A (see note 1) Max. contact voltage 250 VAC, 30 VDC Max. contact current 3 A Max. switching capacity 730 VA (AC), 90 W (DC) Min. permissible load (see note 2) 10 mA at 5 VDC Life expectancy Electrical: 100,000 operations min. (rated load, at 1,800 operations/h) Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations min. (at 18,000 operations/h) Note: 1. The maximum permissible current of COM0 to COM7 is 3 A. 2. This value fulfills the P reference value of opening/closing at a rate of 120 times per min (ambient operating environment and determination criteria according to JIS C5442). Power MOS FET Relay Output Item SRT1-ROF08, SRT2-ROF16 Applicable relay G3DZ-2R6PL (one for each output point) Load voltage 3 to 264 VAC, 3 to 125 VDC Load current 100 mA to 0.3 A Inrush current 6 A (10 ms) SRT
-R SRT
-R 37 Characteristics Power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15% Current consumption (see note) 350 mA max. at 24 VDC Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Connecting Units 8-point Units: 16 per Master 16-point Units: 8 per Master Dielectric strength 2,000 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current) between all output terminals and power supply, between communication terminals, and between contacts of different polarities 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current) between all output terminals and power supply, between communication terminals, and between all power supply terminals and communications terminals Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 0.75-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 100 m/s2 Destruction: 300 m/s2 Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions Terminal strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s Screw tightening torque 0.6 to 1.18 N 􀀀 m Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight 8-point models: 145 g max., 16-point models: 240 g max. Approved standards UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14 Note: The above current consumption is a value with all the points turned ON including the current consumption of the G6D coil for the Remote Output Terminal. SRT
-R SRT
-R 38 Nomenclature SRT2-ROC16 SRT2-ROF16 SRT1-ROC08 SRT1-ROF08 Mounting Holes Output Terminals I/O Power Supply Terminals Connect 24-VDC power supply Communications Power Supply Terminals Connect 24-VDC power supply. CompoBus/S Terminals Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable. Mounting Holes DIP Switch Used for node number setting and holding or clearing outputs for communications error. Note: Always turn off the Unit before changing DIP switch settings. Mounting Holes Output Terminals I/O Power Supply Terminals Connect 24-VDC power supply Communications Power Supply Terminals Connect 24-VDC power supply. CompoBus/S Terminals Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable. Mounting Holes DIP Switch Used for node number setting and holding or clearing outputs for communications error. 0 to 15 ERR COMM PWR Output HOLD/CLEAR setting (Output model only) Baud rate setting Node address setting Indicators Indicator Display Color Meaning PWR Lit Green The communications power supply is ON. Not lit The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Lit Yellow Normal communications Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Lit Red A communications error has occurred. Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. 0 to 15 (see note) Lit Yellow The corresponding I/O signal is ON. Not lit The corresponding I/O signal is OFF. Note: The SRT1-RO
08 does not have indicators 8 to 15. SRT
-R SRT
-R 39 Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode Mode Pin 1 Setting HOLD ON Output status is maintained when a communications error occurs. CLEAR OFF Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs. Note: 1. Pin 1 is factory-set to OFF. 2. This function is available to the Output Terminal only. Node Number Settings Node number Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 8 4 2 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF ON ON ON 8 ON OFF OFF OFF 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 ON OFF ON OFF 11 ON OFF ON ON 12 ON ON OFF OFF 13 ON ON OFF ON 14 ON ON ON OFF 15 ON ON ON ON Note: 1. The node number is factory-set to 0. 2. For node number setting, refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266). SRT
-R SRT
-R 40 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT1-ROC08 SRT1-ROF08 Mounting Holes SRT2-ROC16 SRT2-ROF16 Mounting Holes 100 50 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 50 50 155 Thirty two, M3 Sixteen, M3 50 50 50 80 40 135 40 SRT
-R SRT
-R 41 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT1-ROC08 SRT2-ROC16 Note: The G3DZ-2R6PL Power MOS FET Relay is inserted into this portion of the SRT1-ROF08 and SRT2-ROF16. Relay driver circuit Internal circuit Later blocks (See note) * Relay driver circuit Relay driver circuit Relay driver circuit External Connections Lamp Lamp Lamp Lamp Load power supply Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example Output SRT2-ROC16 SRT2-ROF16 Note: 1. Dotted lines indicate internal connections. SRT1-ROC08 and SRT1-ROF08 have the 0 to 7 and COM0 to COM3 terminals only. 2. The above is a connection example of the SRT2-ROC16 with G6D Relays mounted. G3DZ Power MOS FET Relays are mounted to the SRT1-ROF08 and SRT2-ROF16. 24-VDC power supply Communications path Load Power supply Load Power supply Load Load Load Power supply Load Power supply Load Load Load Power supply Load Power supply Load Load Load Power supply Load Power supply Load Load *(see note 2) Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. Refer to page 80 for details. 42 Connector Terminal SRT2-VID/VOD Compact Connector Terminals Save Wiring Effort and Enable Long-distance Communications Long-distance or high-speed communications mode is selectable. Incorporates I/O connectors making it possible to minimize the size. I/O connectors save wiring effort. Flexible DIN track mounting is possible through a DIN track attachment. Eight-point sensor connector models and 16-point MIL connector models are the same size. Features Vertical or horizontal DIN track mounting according to the available space is possible. Saves space and easily connects to other devices without wiring effort. Standard mounting (Sensor connector model) Mounting with DIN track attachment Standard mounting (MIL connector model) Communications and power supply connector DIN track G7TC Sensor connector Indicators Setting switch DIN track mounting hook MIL connector Ordering Information I/O classification Internal I/O circuit common I/O points I/O connection method Model Digital input NPN (+ common) 8 Sensor connector SRT2-VID08S PNP (– common) Se so co ec o SRT2-VID08S-1 Digital output NPN (– common) SRT2-VOD08S PNP (+ common) SRT2-VOD08S-1 Digital input NPN (+ common) 16 MIL connector SRT2-VID16ML PNP (– common) 6 co ec o SRT2-VID16ML-1 Digital output NPN (– common) SRT2-VOD16ML PNP (+ common) SRT2-VOD16ML-1 Mounting hook A SRT2-ATT01 Mounting hook B SRT2-ATT02 Note: For details about connecting the SRT2-VID or SRT2-VOD to the Master Unit, refer to page 10. SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 43 Specifications Ratings Inputs Item SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1 Input current 6 mA max./point at 24 V, 3 mA max./point at 17 V ON delay time 1.5 ms max. OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. ON voltage 15 VDC min. (Between each input terminal and V: NPN. Between each input and G: PNP.) OFF voltage 5 VDC max. (Between each input terminal and V: NPN. Between each input and G: PNP.) OFF current 1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Maximum number of inputs 8 12 Number of circuits 8 points/common, 1 circuit 16 points/common, 1 circuit Outputs Item SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1 Rated output current 0.3 A/point 0.3 A/point (2-A common) (See note.) Residual voltage 1.2 V max. ON delay time 0.5 ms max. OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Number of circuits 8 points/common, 1 circuit 16 points/common, 1 circuit Note: When using V/G terminals in an MIL connector, ensure that the current per terminal for the V/G terminals does not exceed 1 A. Characteristics Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC I/O power supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC +10%/–15%) I/O power supply current Sensor connector: 2.4 A max., MIL connector: 2.0 A max. Current consumption (see note) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2 (50 m/s2 for SRT2-ATT02) Shock resistance 200 m/s2 Dielectric strength 500 VAC (between insulated circuits) Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –25°C to 65°C Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation) Storage: 25% to 85% Mounting strength No damage when 100 N pull load was applied in all directions (40 N load for SRT2-ATT02) Terminal strength No damage when the following loads were applied: Communications connector: 100 N Sensor connector: 40 N MIL connector: 100 N Screw tightening torque Communications connector: 0.25 N 􀀀 m Node address setting Settings made at DIP switch (set before supplying power for Slave communications) Weight Approx. 75 g max. Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output Remote Terminal. SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 44 Nomenclature SRT2-VID08S/SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VOD08S/SRT2-VOD08S-1 (Sensor Connector Models) SRT2-VID16ML/SRT2-VID16ML-1 SRT2-VOD16ML/SRT2-VOD16ML-1 (MIL Connector Models) Communications Connectors I/O Connectors Indicators DIP Switch Communications Connectors I/O Connectors Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode Setting Communications Mode Setting Node Address Setting Reserved for System Use (Always OFF) Indicators Indicator Color Display Meaning PWR Green Lit The communications power supply is ON. Not lit The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Yellow Lit Normal communications Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Red Lit A communications error has occurred. Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. 0 to 7 (for 8-point I/O) 0 to 15 (for 16-point I/O) Yellow Lit The corresponding I/O signal is ON. Not lit The corresponding I/O signal is OFF. Name Power Communications Communications error Input (output) Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode SW8 (HOLD) Setting OFF Output status is cleared. ON Output status is maintained. Communications Mode SW7 (HOLD) Setting OFF High-speed communications mode ON Long-distance communications mode Node Number Settings Node number Pin 4 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 1 8 4 2 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF ON ON ON 8 ON OFF OFF OFF 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 ON OFF ON OFF 11 ON OFF ON ON 12 ON ON OFF OFF 13 ON ON OFF OFF 14 ON ON ON OFF 15 ON ON ON ON Note: Be sure to perform settings with the Slave power supply OFF. SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 45 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VOD08S SRT2-VOD08S-1 SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1 SRT2-VOD16ML SRT2-VOD16ML-1 SRT2-ATT01 SRT2-ATT02 Dimensions when Unit is mounted. SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 46 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT2-VOD08S-1 SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VOD08S SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1 SRT2-VOD16ML SRT2-VOD16ML-1 Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Photocoupler Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Internal circuit Voltage drop Voltage drop Voltage drop Voltage drop SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 47 Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Examples SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1 SRT2-VOD08S SRT2-VOD16ML SRT2-VOD08S-1 SRT2-VOD16ML-1 CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications power supply I/O power supply Pin numbers Sensor Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) Three-wired sensor Sensor Brown (White) Blue (Black) Two-wired sensor Sensor Three-wired sensor Sensor Two-wired sensor Sensor Three-wired sensor Sensor Two-wired sensor Sensor Three-wired sensor Sensor Two-wired sensor Output device Solenoid etc. Output device Valve etc. Output device Solenoid etc. Output device Valve etc. Output device Solenoid etc. Output device Valve etc. Output device Solenoid etc. Output device Valve etc. Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) Brown (White) Blue (Black) Note: 1. V terminals and G terminals are respectively connected internally. When supplying power for I/O from communications connectors, power can be supplied to the sensor output devices from V and G terminals. 2. When using an inductive load (solenoid, valve etc.), either use one with an internal reverse electromotive force absorption diode or attach a diode externally. SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 48 Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. Refer to page 80 for common precautions. Communications Connector Pin Arrangement 24-VDC communications power supply 24-VDC I/O power supply CompoBus/S communications The following solderless terminals are recommended. • Manufacturer: Weidmuller Sleeve (Part No. 046290) Solderless terminal Cable Two-wire insertion (Part No. 901851) Solderless terminal Cable The following product is a dedicated tool. • Manufacturer: Weidmuller PZ1.5 Crimper (Part No. 900599) Sensor Connector Pin Arrangement SRT2-VID08S/VID08S-1 SRT2-VOD08S/VOD08S-1 Model Cable conductor size XS8A-0441 0.3 to 0.5 mm2 XS8A-0442 0.14 to 0.2 mm2 Note: The XS8A-0441 or XS8A-0442 Connector is not provided with the SRT-VID or SRT2-VOD. Place an order for the connector separately. Calculate the cable conductor size as follows. The following information is given on each sensor cable: Cable dia. (Number of conductors/Conductor dia.) Conductor size (mm2) = (Conductor dia./2)2 x p x Number of conductors Example: E3S-A 4 dia. (18/0.12) Conductor size (mm2) = (0.12/2)2 x 3.14 x 18 􀀀 0.20 The conductor size is 0.2 mm2. Therefore, use the XS8A-0442. MIL Connector Pin Arrangement SRT2-VID16ML/VID16ML-1 Function Pin No. Pin No. OUT0 IN0 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 G G V V 20 20 18 18 16 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 8 8 6 6 4 4 2 2 Function Function Pin No. Pin No. OUT8 IN8 OUT9 IN9 OUT10 IN10 OUT11 IN11 OUT12 IN12 OUT13 IN13 OUT14 IN14 OUT15 IN15 G G V V 19 19 17 17 15 15 13 13 11 11 9 9 7 7 5 5 3 3 1 1 SRT2-VOD16ML/VOD16ML-1 Function Note: 1. No cable connector is provided. Order the connector separately. • Applicable Connector XG4M-2030-T • Applicable Connector Cables G79-O50C G79-O25C G79-I50C G79-I25C 2. Refer to the following table for ordering information on the applicable Cables. SRT2-VID/VOD SRT2-VID/VOD 49 Applicable Cables Connectable product Model Applicable Cable I/O Block G7TC-OC16 G7TC-OC08 G7TC-ID16-5 G7TC-IA16-5 G79-O50C (L = 500 mm) G7TC IA16 G7VC Series G70A Series G70D Series e G79-O25C (L = 250 mm) Connector-Terminal Conversion Unit XW2B Series Digital Display Unit M7F I/O Block G7TC-ID16 G7TC-IA16 e G79-I50C (L = 500 mm) G7TC-OC16-1 G79-I25C (L = 250 mm) 50 Sensor Terminal SRT1-
D08S Connector Connection Models that Allows Easy Connection to Sensors and Output Devices Sensors with easy-to-wire connectors are easily attached or detached. Connects to 2-wired sensors. Remote teaching of the Sensor Terminal is possible with the PC by using output signals of the Sensor Terminal. DIN track mounting and screw mounting are available. Ordering Information Classification Internal I/O circuit common I/O points Model For input NPN (– common) 8 input points SRT1-ID08S For I/O NPN (– common) 4 input/4 output points SRT1-ND08S For output NPN (– common) 8 output points SRT1-OD08S Specifications Ratings Input Item SRT1-ID08S/-ND08S Input current 10 mA max./point ON delay time 1 ms max. OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. ON voltage 12 VDC min. between each input terminal and VCC, the external sensor power supply OFF voltage 4 VDC max. between each input terminal and VCC, the external sensor power supply OFF current 1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Input indicator LED (yellow) Output Item SRT1-ND08S SRT1-OD08S Rated output current 20 mA/point 30 mA/point Residual voltage 1 V max. 0.6 V max. ON delay time 1 ms max. --- OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. --- Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Insulation method Photocoupler Output indicator LED (yellow) SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 51 Characteristics Communications power supply voltage (see note 1) 14 to 26.4 VDC Current consumption (see note 2) 50 mA max. at 24 VDC Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits) Noise immunity Power supply normal: ±600 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms Power supply common: ±1,500 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2 Destruction: 300 m/s2 Mounting method M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions (except the DIN track directions and a pulling force of 10 N Terminal strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions Tighten each screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N 􀀀 m Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight SRT1-ID08S/OD08S: 100 g max., SRT1-ND08S: 80 g max. Note: 1. The communications power supply voltage must be 20.4 to 26.4 VDC if the Unit is connected to 2-wired proximity sensors. 2. The above current consumption is a value with all the points turned OFF excluding the current consumption of the sensor connected to the Sensor Terminal. External Sensor Power Supply Power supply voltage 13.5 to 26.4 VDC Current consumption 500 mA max. in total Nomenclature SRT1-ID08S SRT1-ND08S CompoBus/S Terminals Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable. Sensor Terminal I/O Connectors Connect the cables from the sensors here. I/O Indicators Indicate the status of each point. (Lit when the input or output is ON.) The SRT1-ID08S has 8 input indicators and the SRT1-ND08S has 4 input indicators and 4 output indicators. DIP Switch The DIP switch’s pins have the following functions: Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting Pin 5: Reserved (Always OFF.) Pin 6: Hold/clear outputs for communications error DIN Track Mounting Hook Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track. CompoBus/S Indicators Indicate the operating status of the Slave and the status of communications. Mounting Screw Holes Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel. Indicators PWR COMM ERR IN0 to 3 IN0 to 7 OUT0 to 3 Communications Power Supply Terminals Connect the communications power supply. SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 52 Indicators Indicator Name Display Color Meaning PWR Power supply Lit Green The communications power supply is ON. Not lit The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Communication Lit Yellow Normal communications Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Communication Lit Red A communications error has occurred. error Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. 0 to 3 (4 inputs/outputs) Input Lit Yellow The corresponding input is ON. 0 to 7 (8 inputs) Not lit The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in standby status. 0 to 3 (4i t / t t ) o Output Lit Yellow The corresponding output is ON. 4 inputs/outputs) Not lit The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is in standby status. Switch Setting All pins are factory-set to OFF. Hold/Clear outputs for Node number communications error settings Reserved (OFF) Pin 5 (Reserved) Always set pin 5 to OFF. Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode (SRT-ND16S) HOLD Function OFF Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs. ON Output status is maintained when a communications error occurs. Node Number Settings Node number 1 2 4 8 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON 13 ON OFF ON ON 14 OFF ON ON ON 15 ON ON ON ON SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 53 SRT1-OD08S DIP Switch Mounting Screw Holes Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel. CompoBus/S Indicators Indicate the operating status of the Slave and the status of communications. Output Indicators Indicate the output status of each channel. Communications Terminals Communications Power Supply Terminals Connect the communications cable. DIN Track Mounting Hook Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track. Output Connectors Connect the cables from the output device. Switch Setting All pins are factory-set to OFF. Hold/Clear outputs for Node number communications error settings Reserved (OFF) Pin 5 (Reserved) Always set pin 5 to OFF. Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode (SRT-ND16S) HOLD Function OFF Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs. ON Output status is maintained when a communications error occurs. Node Number Settings Node number 4 3 2 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF OFF ON OFF 3 OFF OFF ON ON 4 OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF ON OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF 7 OFF ON ON ON 8 ON OFF OFF OFF 9 ON OFF OFF ON 10 ON OFF ON OFF 11 ON OFF ON ON 12 ON ON OFF OFF 13 ON ON OFF ON 14 ON ON ON OFF 15 ON ON ON ON SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 54 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT1-ID08S Mounting Holes SRT1-ND08S Mounting Holes 100 Cover opening and closing directions Two, 4.2 dia or M4 Four, M3 50 50 70 max. Four, M3 Cover opening and closing directions Two, 4.2 dia or M4 (75) (75) SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 55 SRT1-OD08S 100 Cover opening and closing directions (75) 2.8 37 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 7 Four, M3 50 40 92 40±0.2 92±0.2 Mounting Holes 4 6 Cable Connector for SRT1-OD08S Applicable conductor size (mm2) Model 0.3 to 0.5 XS8A-0441 0.14 to 0.2 XS8A-0442 0.3 to 0.5 XS8B-0443 XS8B-0443 (Relay Socket ) XS8A-044
(Cable Connector) Plug connector Cover Model number Pin number Check window Calculate the cable conductor size as explained below. The following information is given on each sensor cable: Cable dia. (Number of conductors/Conductor dia.) Conductor size (mm2) = (Conductor dia./2)2 x p x Number of conductors Example: E3S-A 4 dia. (18/0.12) Conductor size (mm2) = (0.12/2)2 x 3.14 x 18 􀀀 0.20 The conductor size is 0.2 mm2. Therefore, use the XS8A-0442. SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 56 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT1-ID08S SRT1-ND08S Internal circuit Photocoupler Internal circuit Photocoupler Photocoupler SRT1-OD08S Internal circuit For one output External Connections SRT1-ID08S SRT1-ND08S Three-wired Sensor Two-wired Sensor Sensor with Teaching Function Sensor with External Diagnostic function Sensor with Bank-switching Function Three-wired Sensor Brown Black Blue Sensor Brown Blue Sensor Brown Black Pink Blue Sensor Brown Black Blue Sensor Two-wired Sensor Brown Blue Sensor SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 57 Terminal Arrangement and I/O Device Connection Example Input SRT1-ID08S I/O SRT1-ND08S Photoelectric Sensor Proximity Sensor (Sensor with Teaching Function, Sensor with External Diagnostic function, Sensor with Bank-switching Function) 24 VDC Communications power supply CompoBus/S communications CompoBus/S communications Communications power supply Blue Brown Blue Black Brown Photoelectric Sensor Proximity Sensor (3-wired Sensor) Proximity Sensor (2-wired Sensor) CompoBus/S communications Communications power supply CompoBus/S communications Communications power supply Brown Brown Blue 24 VDC Orange CompoBus/S CompoBus/S Output SRT1-OD08S CompoBus/S SOURCE 24 VDC BDL BDH – + CompoBus/S communications Communications power supply Output connector Pin number Solenoid, etc. Valve, etc. Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. General Safety Precautions Installation Environment Do not install the Unit in the following places. • Places with water, oil, or chemical sprayed on the Unit. • Places with rapid temperature changes. • Places with high humidity resulting in condensation. • Places with intense electric and magnetic fields. • Places with excessive vibration or shock. Wiring To prevent inductive noise, do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with or near the cables. Make sure that the polarity of each terminal is correct. Make sure that the communications path and power line are connected correctly. Secure the cables properly. Do not pull the cables with strong force, otherwise the cables may be disconnected from the terminals or connectors of the Unit. Do not touch the Unit when the Unit is used in places with high ambient temperatures because the surface temperature of the Unit may be high. Do not use paint thinner to clean the surface of the Unit, otherwise the surface will be damaged or discolored. SRT1-
D08S SRT1-
D08S 58 Correct Use Use the Unit under its rated conditions. Mount the Unit with M4 screws or to DIN tracks securely. Typical Causes of Communications Errors • The cables are not connected correctly. • The node number setting is incorrect. • The baud rate setting is incorrect. • There is a strong noise source, such as an inverter motor, near the Unit. Install the Unit as far as possible from the noise source or shield the noise source. Others Use OMRON’s XS8A-0441 or XS8A-0442 Connectors with the Unit. Insert each connector into the Unit until the connector snaps in place. Make sure that terminal number 1 of the connector is on the lock lever side when inserting the connector. Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) for wiring the Unit. 59 Sensor Amplifier Terminal SRT1-

D04S Snap On to Connect and Save Wiring Effort The 4-channel fiber photoelectric amplifiers in Terminals with connectors offer a low cost and space savings. The product lineup included Terminal Block Units for easy connection to sensors with amplifiers, limit switches, etc. Connect to up to eight channels of sensors by using Expansion Blocks. Features Low Cost and Space Savings with Four-channel Fiber Connectors Just Snap On to Connect Connector Units Fiber connector (1 channel) Fiber connector (4 channels) Terminal Block Unit Photoelectric sensor Various input units can be connected. Proximity sensor Basic switch and limit switch SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 60 Ordering Information CompoBus/S Sensor Amplifier Terminals Classification I/O points Model Communications 4 SRT1-TID04S SRT1-TKD04S Expansion SRT1-XID04S SRT1-XKD04S Connector Units Classification Specifications Model E3X-N Connector Type General-purpose, 1 channel E3X-NT16 Multi-functional, 1 channel E3X-NT26 Long distance, high accuracy, 1 channel E3X-NH16 Multi-functional, 4 channels E3X-NM16 Terminal Block Unit One input point E39-JID01 SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 61 Specifications Characteristics CompoBus/S Sensor Amplifier Terminals Item Communication Terminals Expansion Terminals Model SRT1-TID04S SRT1-TKD04S SRT1-XID04S SRT1-XKD04S Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC (See note 1) --- --- I/O points 4 input points Connected sensors Total of four E3X-NT
6 or E39-JID01 (See note 2) One E3X-NM16 (See note 2) Total of four E3X-NT
6 or E39-JID01 One E3X-NM16 Current consumption 60 mA max. (See note 3) 10 mA max. (See note 3) Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits) Noise immunity Power supply normal: ±600 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms Power supply common: ±1,500 V for 10 minutes with a pulse width of 100 ns to 1 ms Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2 Destruction: 300 m/s2 Mounting method M4 screw mounting or 35-mm DIN track mounting Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions (except the DIN track directions and a pulling force of 10 N Terminal strength No damage when 49 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions. Tighten each screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N 􀀀 m. Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight 70 g max. 65 g max. 45 g max. 35 g max. Note: 1. The communications power supply voltage must be 20.4 to 26.4 VDC if the Terminal is connected to 2-wired proximity sensors. 2. When adding Connector Units, use SRT1-XID04S or SRT1-XKD04S. 3. The value doesn’t include the current consumption of Connector Units. With E3X-N Connectors Model E3X-NH16 E3X-NT16 E3X-NT26 E3X-NM16 Current consumption 75 mA max. 50 mA max. 150 mA Response time 1 ms max. (4.0 ms max. when connected to the SRM1-

D04S) 500 mS max. (2.0 ms max. when connected to the SRT1-

D04S) Timer function Not available OFF-delay timer (fixed to 40 ms) Remote teaching input Not available Available (Remote teaching disabled) Indicator Orange LED: Lit during output operation Green LED: Lit with stable light reception or no light Teaching confirmation function Indicators (red/green LED) and buzzer Output Light ON and Dark ON switch selectable Ambient illumination Sunlight: 10,000 lux max.; incandescent lamp: 3,000 lux max. Insulation resistance 20 MW max. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min Vibration resistance Destruction:10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Destruction:500 m/s2 Mounting method Connector connection to the SRT1-

D04S Mounting strength No damage when 49 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight 30 g max. 30 g max. 30 g max. 60 g max. SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 62 Terminal Block Units Model E39-JID01 Input current 10 mA max. ON voltage 12 VDC min. between input terminal and external sensor power supply OFF voltage 4 VDC max. between input terminal and external sensor power supply OFF current 1 mA max. ON delay time 1 ms max. (connected to SRT1-

D04S) OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. (connected to SRT1-

D04S) Input indicators LED (Orange) External sensor current capacity 50 mA max. Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude Shock resistance Malfunction: 200 m/s2 Destruction: 300 m/s2 Mounting method M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting Mounting strength No damage when 50 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions (except the DIN track directions and a pulling force of 10 N Terminal strength No damage when 49 N pull load was applied for 10 s in all directions. Tighten each screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N 􀀀 m. Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight 25 g max. SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 63 Nomenclature SRT1-TID04S SRT1-TKD04S Mounting Screw Holes Communications Terminals Communications Power Supply Terminals Contact 0 Contact 1 Contact 2 Contact 3 DIN Track Mounting Hook Node Number Settings Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) for details on DIP switch settings. Mounting Screw Holes DIN Track Mounting Hook Contacts 0 to 3 Communications Power Supply Terminals Connect a 24-VDC power supply. Communications Terminals Connect a communications cable. DIP Switch Indicators Indicator Name Display Color Meaning PWR Power supply Lit Green The communications power supply is ON. Not lit G ee The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Communications Lit Yellow Normal communications. Not lit e o A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Communications Lit Red A communications error has occurred. error Not lit ed Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 64 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT1-TID04 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Two, 4.5 dia. Mounting Holes (75) 3.4 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Two, 4.5 dia. SRT1-XID04S Mounting Holes (75) 3.4 SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 65 SRT1-TKD04S Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Two, 4.5 dia. Mounting Holes (75) 3.4 SRT1-XKD04S Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Two, 4.5 dia. Mounting Holes (75) 3.4 SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 66 E3X-NM16 Output indicator Stability indicator Eight, 2.4 dia. E3X-NT
6 Output indicator Stability indicator Two, 2.4 dia. SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 67 E3X-NH16 Light level indicators Threshold indicators Output indicator Two, 2.4 dia. E39-JID01 Output indicator Installation Internal Circuit Configuration E39-JID01 Internal circuit SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 68 Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Terminal. Refer to page 80 for precautions common to all SRT1 Terminals. General Safety Precautions Connector Units Use only the Connector Units listed in this data sheet for the Sensor Amplifier Units. E39-JID01 Terminal Block Unit Do not apply any voltage to the Terminal Block Unit. Correct Use Expanding Sensor Amplifier Terminals 1. Remove the cover from the side of the SRT1-T
D04S. (See Figure 1.) 2. When the cover is removed, you can see the expansion connector inside. 3. Connect this expansion connector to the connector located on the side of the SRT1-X
D04S. (See Figure 2.) Figure 1 Cover Figure 2 Connector Attaching and Removing Connector Units (SRT1-TID04S, SRT1-XID04S, E3X-NT
6, E39-JID01) Attaching Connector Units 1. Hook Section A of the Connector Unit onto Section B of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal. 2. Push in the Connector Unit until Section C locks inside Section D of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal. Section C Section D Section A Section B Bottom View Section A Removing Connector Units 1. While pushing Section D, pull the Connector Unit in direction E. 2. When Section D releases from the lock, the Connector Unit can be removed. Push here Section D SRT1-

D04S SRT1-

D04S 69 Attaching or Removing Connector Unit (SRT1-TKD04S, SRT1-XKD04S, E3X-NM16) Attaching Connector Unit 1. Hook Section A of the Connector Unit onto Section B of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal. 2. Push in the Connector Unit until Section C locks inside Section D of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal. Bottom View Section A Section C Section D Section A Section B Removing Connector Unit 1. While pushing Section D, pull the Connector Unit in direction E. 2. When Section D releases from the lock, the Connector Unit can be removed. Push here Section D Channel Numbers Channel numbers 1 to 4 of the E3X-NM16 correspond to contact numbers 0 to 3 of the SRT1-TKD04S, and to contact numbers 4 to 7 of the SRT1-XKD04S. 70 Analog Input Terminal SRT2-AD04 Compact Analog Input Model is the Same Shape as 16-point Remote I/O Terminals Allows flexible input point settings up to a maximum of four points. Resolution: 1/6,000 Takes only 1 ms to exchange each input point. Wide input ranges available. 105 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D) Ordering Information Classification I/O points Model Analog Input Terminal 1 to 4 (selectable with DIP switch) SRT2-AD04 Note: For details about connecting the SRT2-AD04 to the Master Unit. Refer to page 10. Specifications Ratings Input Item Voltage input Current input Max. signal input ±15 V ±30 mA Input impedance 1 MW max. Approx. 250 W Resolution 1/6,000 (FS) Total 25°C ±0.3% FS ±0.4% FS accuracy –10 to 55°C ±0.6% FS ±0.8% FS Conversion time 4 ms/4 points, 3 ms/3 points, 2 ms/2 points, and 1 ms/1 point Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min between communications power supply, analog input, and communications terminals (see note) Note: There is no insulation between analog inputs. Characteristics Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC (possible to provide through dedicated flat cable) Current consumption 100 mA max. Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Dielectric strength 500 VAC (between insulated circuits) Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2 Shock resistance 200 m/s2 Mounting strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied in all directions. Terminal strength No damage with 100 N pull load applied Screw tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 N 􀀀 m Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C Storage: –25°C to 65°C Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation) Weight Approx. 120 g SRT2-AD04 SRT2-AD04 71 Nomenclature SRT2-AD04 Mounting Screw Holes DIN Track Mounting Hook Terminal Block Indicators Indicators Indicator Name Color Display Meaning PWR Power supply Green Lit The communications power supply is ON. Not lit The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Communication Yellow Lit Normal communications Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Communication Red Lit A communications error has occurred. error Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. U.ERR Unit error Red Lit An error has occurred in the Unit. Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. DIP Switch (SW101) (Open cover to access.) Pin 1 Pin 2 Input points OFF OFF 4 points (default setting) OFF ON 3 points (inputs 0 to 2 enabled) ON OFF 2 points (inputs 0 and 2 enabled) ON ON 1 point (input 0 enabled) Pin 3 Communications mode OFF High-speed communications (default setting) ON Long-distance communications Pin 4 Be sure to turn OFF. Pin No. Node address Pin 5 23 Pin 6 22 Pin 7 21 Pin 8 20 The default setting is for all of these pins to be OFF. DIP Switch (SW102) (Open cover to access.) Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Range for inputs 0, 1 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Range for inputs 2, 3 OFF OFF OFF 0 to 5 (V) (default setting) ON OFF OFF 1 to 5 (V) OFF ON OFF 0 to 10 (V) ON ON OFF –10 to 10 (V) OFF OFF ON 4 to 20 (mA) ON OFF ON 0 to 20 (mA) Do not make any settings other than the ones listed above. Pin 7 Mean value processing OFF Without mean value processing (default setting) ON With mean value processing (mean for 8 operations) Pin 8 Be sure to turn OFF. SRT2-AD04 SRT2-AD04 72 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT2-AD04 Mounting Holes Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT2-AD04 Isolation DC-DC static converter Internal circuit Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Analog ground Terminal Arrangement SRT2-AD04 Note: When the input is current input, short-circuit the “V+” terminals and the “I+” terminals. When short-circuiting, use the short-circuiting tool provided as an accessory. Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. For details about general precautions, refer to page 80. Connections to the Master Unit Connections cannot be made to the following Master Units. If the following Master Units are connected, incorrect data may be transferred. C200HW-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported) CQM1-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported) SRM1-C0
, SRM1-C0
-V1 (-V2 and later versions supported) C200PC-ISA
2-SRM 3G8B3-SRM0
SDD-CS1 (made by NKE Ltd.) 73 Analog Output Terminal SRT2-DA02 Compact Analog Output Model is the Same Shape as 16-point Remote I/O Terminals Two output points or 1 output point is selectable. Resolution: 1/6,000 105 x 48 x 50 (W x H x D) Ordering Information Classification I/O points Model Analog Output Terminal 1 or 2 (selectable with DIP switch) SRT2-DA02 Note: For details about connecting the SRT2-DA02 to the Master Unit, refer to page 10. Specifications Ratings Output Item Voltage output Current output External output permissible load resistance 5 kW min. 600 W max. Output impedance 0.5 W max. --- Resolution 1/6,000 (FS) Total 25°C ±0.4% FS accuracy –10 to 55°C ±0.8% FS Conversion time 2 ms/2 points and 2 ms/1 point Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min between communications power supply, analog output, and communications terminals (see note) Note: There is no insulation between analog outputs. Characteristics Communications power supply voltage 14 to 26.4 VDC (power supply possible from dedicated flat cable) Current consumption (see note) 170 mA max. Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Dielectric strength 500 VAC (between insulated circuits) Noise immunity Conforms to IEC61000-4-4, 2 kV (power lines) Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2 Shock resistance 200 m/s2 Mounting strength No damage when 100 N pull load was applied in all directions Terminal strength No damage when 100 N pull load was applied Screw tightening torque 0.3 to 0.5 N 􀀀 m Ambient temperature Operating: –10°C to 55°C Storage: –25°C to 65°C Ambient humidity Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation) Weight Approx. 100 g Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external load. SRT2-DA02 SRT2-DA02 74 Nomenclature SRT2-DA02 Mounting Screw Holes DIN Track Mounting Hook Terminal Block Indicators Indicators Indicator Name Color Display Meaning PWR Power supply Green Lit The communications power supply is ON. Not lit The communications power supply is OFF. COMM Communication Yellow Lit Normal communications Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. ERR Communication Red Lit A communications error has occurred. error Not lit Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status. U.ERR Unit error Red Lit An error has occurred in the Unit. Not lit A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in standby status. DIP Switch (SW101) (Open cover to access.) Pin 1 Be sure to turn OFF. Pin 2 Output points OFF 2 points (default setting) ON 1 point (output 0 enabled) Pin 3 Communications mode OFF High-speed communications (default setting) ON Long-distance communications Pin 4 Be sure to turn OFF. Pin No. Node addresses Pin 5 23 Pin 6 22 Pin 7 21 Pin 8 20 The default setting is for all of these switches to be OFF. DIP Switch (SW102) (Open cover to access.) Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Range for output 0 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Range for output 1 OFF OFF OFF 0 to 5 (V) (default setting) ON OFF OFF 1 to 5 (V) OFF ON OFF 0 to 10 (V) ON ON OFF –10 to 10 (V) OFF OFF ON 4 to 20 (mA) Do not make any settings other than the ones listed above. Pin 7 Pin 8 Output during communications error OFF OFF Clear at the output lower limit when communications error occurs. (default setting) OFF ON Clear at the output upper limit when communications error occurs. ON OFF Clear at the output lower limit when communications error occurs (however, if the range is –10 to 10 V, the output will be 0). ON ON Output held when communications error occurs. SRT2-DA02 SRT2-DA02 75 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT2-DA02 Mounting Holes Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT2-DA02 Isolation DC-DC static converter Internal circuit Output 0 Output 1 Analog ground Terminal Arrangement SRT2-DA02 Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. For details about general precautions, refer to page 80. Connections to the Master Unit Connections cannot be made to the following Master Units. If the following Master Units are connected, incorrect data may be transferred. C200HW-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported) CQM1-SRM21 (-V1 and later versions supported) SRM1-C0
, SRM1-C0
-V1 (-V2 and later versions supported) C200PC-ISA
2-SRM 3G8B3-SRM0
SDD-CS1 (made by NKE Ltd.) 76 Remote I/O Module SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P Module Type that Allows PCB Mounting Compact size at 60 x 16 x 35 (W x H x D) Lineup now includes the 16-point input model and 16-point output model. Ordering Information I/O classification Internal I/O circuit common I/O points Rated voltage I/O rated voltage Model Input NPN (+ common) 16 24 VDC 24 VDC SRT1-ID16P Output NPN (– common) SRT1-OD16P Specifications Ratings Input (SRT1-ID16P) Input current 2 mA max./point ON delay time 1.5 ms max. OFF delay time 1.5 ms max. ON voltage 15 VDC min. between each input terminal and BS+ terminal OFF voltage 5 VDC max. between each input terminal and BS + terminal Output (SRT1-OD16P) Rated output current 0.2 A/point, 0.6 A/common Residual voltage 0.6 V max. between each output terminal and G terminal at 0.2 A Leakage current 0.1 mA max. between each output terminal and G terminal at 24 VDC SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P 77 Characteristics Communications power supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC I/O power supply voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15% Current consumption (see note) 60 mA max. Connection method Multi-drop method and T-branch method Secondary branches cannot be connected to T-branch lines. Connecting Units 8 Input Terminals and 8 Output Terminals per Master Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (1-mA sensing current between insulated circuits) 5-V output current 20 mA max. (5 V 􀀀 0.5 V) LED drive current (COMM, ERR) 10 mA max. (5 VDC) SW carry current (ADR0 to 3, HOLD) 1 mA max. Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C (with no icing or condensation) Storage: –20°C to 65°C (with no icing or condensation) Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% Weight 35 g max. Note: The above current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input model and the current consumption of the load connected to the output model. Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SRT1-ID16P SRT1-OD16P Incorrect insertion prevention pin PCB dimensions (top view) No cumulative tolerance allowed 16 2.54x15=38.1 27.94±0.1 2.54±0.1 2.54x15=38.1 8.95±0.1 1.53±0.1 0.63 27.94±0.1 1.6 1.6 dia. 0.63 3.5 2.54 35 60 2.2 dia. +0.1 0 32-0.9 dia. +0.1 0 SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P 78 Installation Internal Circuit Configuration SRT1-ID16P SRT1-OD16P Internal circuit Internal circuit External Connections Communications Two-wired proximity sensor BS– or G Input Module (SRT1-ID16P) Output Module (SRT1-OD16P) Communications Relay Internal circuit Internal circuit D1: Reverse voltage prevention diode Note: NC in parentheses is for the Input Modules. Node Number Settings and Output HOLD/CLEAR Mode Internal circuit BS– or G Note: Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) for details on the switch. Indicators R: LED current limiting resistor LED1: LED for COMM LED2: LED for ERR The maximum current for LED1 and 2 is 10 mA. Internal circuit The 5-V Output Terminals have positive power supplies (maximum output current of 20 mA) for the ERR and COMM LEDs. Recommended LED colors are red for ERR and yellow for COMM. SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P SRT1-ID􀀀P/OD􀀀P 79 Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. Refer to page 80 for precautions common to all SRT1 Terminals. Correct Use Noise Protection Circuit Add the following protection circuit if noise is generated from the power supply, input section, or output section. Power Supply Noise Protection Circuit L: Coil for the common mode Install the coil near the SRT1. 50 V 100 mF 50 V 0.1 mF BS􀀀 L V BS
Input Section Noise Protection Circuit C: 0.1 mF min. R: Resistor for limiting current to PC PC: Photocoupler Input device 0 to 15 V R G PC C Output Section Noise Protection Circuit V1 and V2: Power supply. R: Resistor for limiting current to PC PC: Photocoupler 0 to 15 Load G V2 PC R V1 5-V Output Terminals The 5-V Output Terminals have positive power supplies (maximum output current of 20 mA) for the ERR and COMM LED. Use them as shown below. Recommended LED colors are red for ERR and yellow for COMM. Wiring Method R: LED current limiting resistor LED1: LED for COMM LED2: LED for ERR The maximum current for the LED1 and 2 is 10 mA. LED1 R R 5 VOUT COMM ERR LED2 SRT
SRT
80 Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Terminal. The following precautions are the same for all SRT1 Terminals. Refer also to the precautions specified for individual Terminals. General Safety Precautions Wiring Turn OFF the Unit before wiring the Unit and do not remove the terminal block cover or touch the terminal block while the Unit is turned ON, otherwise an electric shock may occur. Do not impose any voltage other than the rated voltage on the input terminal. Doing so may result in damage to the Unit or cause the Unit to malfunction. Relay I/O Type SRT1-ROC08 and SRT2-ROC16 Do not connect the Unit to loads operating at any voltage or consuming a total current exceeding the permissible switching voltage or current of the Unit. Doing so may result in the faulty insulation, contact weld, or faulty contact of the relays, or damage to the relays, or cause the relays to malfunction or burn. The life of a relay varies with the switching condition. Test the relays under the actual operating conditions before using the relays within the permissible switching frequency. The use of deteriorated relays may result in the faulty insulation of the relays or cause the relays to burn. Do not use the Unit in places with inflammable gas. Doing so may result in a fire or explosion due to the heat of the relays or a spark from the relays when they are switched. Transistor, Power MOS FET, and SSR I/O Types SRT1-OD04, SRT2-OD08, SRT2-OD16, SRT1-OD16P, SRT1-ROF08, and SRT2-ROF16 Do not connect the Unit to loads consuming a total current exceeding the rated output current of the Unit. Doing so may damage the output element and a short or open-circuit malfunction may result. If the Unit is connected to a DC inductive load, connect a diode to the Unit to protect the Unit from counter-electromotive voltage, otherwise the counter-electromotive voltage may damage the output element and a short or open-circuit malfunction may result. Correct Use Replacing Relays Use the relay removal tool to the left of the screw terminals to replace relays. Turn OFF the Unit to replace relays, otherwise an electric shock may occur or the Unit may malfunction. Installation Environment Do not install the Unit in the following places. Doing so may result in damage to the Unit or cause the Unit to malfunction. • Places with direct sunlight. • Places with ambient temperature ranges not within 0°C to 55°C. • Places with rapid temperature changes resulting in condensation or relative humidity ranges not within 10% to 90%. • Places with corrosive or inflammable gas. • Places with excessive dust, salinity, or metal powder. • Places with vibration or shock affecting the Unit. • Places with water, oil, or chemical sprayed on the Unit. Screw Tightening Torques Tighten all screws of the Unit properly, otherwise the Unit may malfunction. • Tighten each terminal screw to a torque of 0.6 to 1.18 N 􀀀 m (6.2 to 12.0 kgf 􀀀 cm). • Tighten each mounting screw to a torque of 0.6 to 0.98 N 􀀀 m (6.2 to 10.0 kgf 􀀀 cm). Terminal screws Mounting screws Cleaning Use alcohol or benzine to clean the surface of the Unit. Do not use paint thinner to clean the surface, otherwise the surface will be damaged or discolored. Handling Do not drop the Unit or shock or vibrate the Unit excessively. Doing so may result in damage to the Unit or cause the Unit to malfunction. Disassembling, Repairing, and Modifying Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the Unit, otherwise an electric shock may occur or the Unit may malfunction. 81 Position Driver FND-X􀀀-SRT Advanced Servodrivers with Positioner Functions DIO and CompoBus/S Models are Newly Added Servodriver and positioner are combined into one Unit. Conventional U-series, U-series UE type, H-series, and M-series AC Servomotors can be used. Feeder control/DTP control and single operation/ automatic incremental/continuous operation are available. Easy to set, operate, and adjust. Ordering Information Specifications Model CCoompooBuuss//SS mooddeelss For 200-VAC input 6 A FND-X06H-SRT 12 A FND-X12H-SRT 25 A FND-X25H-SRT 50 A FND-X50H-SRT For 100-VAC input 6 A FND-X06L-SRT 12 A FND-X12L-SRT Note: For details, refer to OMNUC FND-X-series User’s Manual (I524). Specifications General Specifications Ambient temperature Operating: 0°C to 55°C Storage: –10°C to 70°C Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 90% (with no icing) Storage: 35% to 90% (with no icing) Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases Dielectric strength 1,500 VACRMS for 1 min at 50/60 Hz Insulation resistance 5 MW min. (at 500 VDC) between power input terminals and between the power terminal and the case Vibration resistance 10 to 150 Hz in X, Y, and Z directions with 0.10-mm single amplitude; acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 max.; time coefficient: 8 min; 4 sweeps Shock resistance 98 m/s2 max., three times each in X, Y, and Z directions Degree of protection Built into panel (IP00) FND-X􀀀-SRT FND-X􀀀-SRT 82 Performance Specifications Model (see note 1) Item FND-X06H-SRT FND-X12H-SRT FND-X25H-SRT FND-X06L-SRT FND-X12L-SRT Continuous output current (0-P) 2.0 A 4.8 A 8.0 A 2.0 A 3.0 A Momentary maximum output current (0-P) 6.0 A 12 A 25 A 6.0 A 12 A Input power supply Single-phase 200/240 VAC (170 to 264 V) 50/60 Hz Single-phase 100/115 VAC (85 to 127 V) 50/60 Hz Position/speed f db k os o /U Series (INC) Optical Incremental encoder, 2,048 pulses/revolution feedback U Series (ABS) Optical Absolute encoder, 1,024 pulses/revolution U-UE Series Optical Incremental encoder, 1,024 pulses/revolution H Series Magnetic Incremental encoder, 2,000 pulses/revolution M Series Resolver, absolute accuracy 0.18° max.; ambient temperature 25° Applicable load inertia U Series (INC) Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor inertia Maximum of 20 times motor’s rotor inertia Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor inertia U Series (ABS) Maximum of 20 times motor’s rotor inertia Maximum of 18 times motor’s rotor inertia Maximum of 20 times motor’s rotor inertia U-UE Series Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor inertia Maximum of 20 times motor’s rotor inertia Maximum of 30 times motor’s rotor inertia H Series Maximum of 10 times motor’s rotor inertia M Series Maximum of 10 times motor’s rotor inertia Inverter method PWM method based on IGBT PWM frequency 10 kHz Weight Approx. 1.5 kg Approx. 2.5 kg Approx. 1.5 kg Frequency response (speed control) 100 Hz (at a load inertia equivalent to motor’s rotor inertia) Position loop gain 1 to 200 (rad/s) Feed forward 0% to 200% of speed reference Pulse rate 1/32,767 􀀀 (pulse rate 1 / pulse rate 2) 􀀀 32,767/1 Positioning completion width 1 to 32,767 (pulses) U Series (INC): 8,192 pulses/revolution; U Series (ABS): 4,096 pulses/revolution; M Series 24,000 pulses/revolution Acceleration/Deceleration time 0 to 9,999 (ms); acceleration and deceleration times set separately. Two types can be set for each. S-curve acceleration/deceleration function available (filter time constant: 0.00 to 32.76 s). Sequence input 19 pts. (limit inputs, origin proximity, RUN command, START, alarm reset, origin search, JOG operation, teaching, point selection, position data, deceleration stop) Photocoupler input: 24 VDC, 8 mA External power supply: 24 VDC ±1 V, 150 mA min. Sequence output 15 pts. (brake output, READY, origin search completion, origin, teaching, motor running, positioning completion, alarm, point output, position selection, speed selection) Open collector output: 24 VDC, 40 mA Monitor output (S t 2 ) o o ou pu Speed monitor 3 V/motor’s rated speed (output accuracy: approx. ±10%) See note 2.) Current monitor 3 V/motor’s maximum current (output accuracy: approx. ±10%) Regenerative absorption capacity 13 W + 17 J 24 W + 17 J 37 W + 22 J 13 W + 17 J 17 W + 17 J Protective functions Overcurrent, overvoltage, voltage drop, resolver disconnection, power status error, clock stopped, overcurrent (soft), speed amp saturation, motor overload, temporary overload, resolver error, speed over, error counter over, parameter setting error, software limit over, coordinate counter over, overrun, encoder disconnection, encoder communications error, absolute encoder backup error, absolute encoder checksum error, absolute encoder absolute error, absolute encoder over speed, encoder data not transmitted, BCD data error, present value undetermined, PTP data not set Note: 1. When using the 100-VAC-input Position Drivers in combination with the U-series or U-series UE type models, use 200-VAC Servomotors (-HA, -TA , or -H models). 2. For the monitor output, the monitor items and voltage polarity can be set by parameter UP-25 (monitor output selection). FND-X􀀀-SRT FND-X􀀀-SRT 83 Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. 200-VAC FND-X06H-SRT/-X12H-SRT 100-VAC FND-X06L-SRT/-X12L-SRT 200-VAC FND-X25H-SRT 80 68 150 158 170 Three, 6 dia. 158 68 Three, M5 Mounting Holes Mounting Holes 119 150 107 158 170 Three, 6 dia. 158 Three, M5 107 Position Drivers Item Model Continuous output current (0-P) Momentary maximum output current (0-P) Input power supply Inverter method PWM frequency Weight 200-VAC input FND-X06H-SRT 2.0 A 6.0 A Single-phase 200/240 VAC PWM method b d 10 kH Approx. 1 5 k 00 C u FND-X12H-SRT 4.8 A 12 A S g e ase (170 to 264 V) e od based on IGBT 0 kHz o 1.5 kg FND-X25H-SRT 8.0 A 25 A 50/60 Hz Approx. 2.5 kg 100-VAC input FND-X06L-SRT 2.0 A 6.0 A Single-phase 100/115 VAC (85 Approx. 1.5 kg FND-X12L-SRT 3.0 A 12 A to 127 V) 50/60 Hz 84 Peripheral Devices Connectors, Cables, and Terminal-block Terminator Dedicated Flat Cable Allows Communication Path Extension and T-branching with Ease Ordering Information Product Appearance Model Specification Branch Connector SCN1-TH4 --- Extension Connector SCN1-TH4E --- Connector Terminator SCN1-TH4T --- Communications Cable SCA1-4F10 Flat cable, 100 m, 4 conductors (0.75 mm2 each) Terminal-block Terminator SRS1-T --- Note: Branch Connectors and Extension Connectors are sold in blocks of 10 Units. Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices 85 Specifications Ratings/Characteristics Rated current 4 A Contact resistance 20 mW max. Insulation resistance 1,000 MW min. (at 500 VDC) Withstand voltage 1,000 VAC for 1 min, leakage current: 1 mA max. Cable pulling strength 50 N (5.1 kgf) min. Operating temperature –20°C to 70°C Materials Housing PA66 resin (UL94V-2) Branching and extension: Gray Cover Terminator: Black Contact Phosphor bronze and nickel base, tin plated Dimensions Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated. SCN1-TH4 Branch Connector SCN1-TH4E Extension Connector SCN1-TH4T Connector Terminator Peripheral Devices Peripheral Devices 86 SRS1-T Terminal-block Terminator 40 Two, 4.4 dia. 30±0.2 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 20 20 Mounting Holes Precautions Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) before using the Unit. Correct Use The SCN1-TH4, SCN1-TH4E, and SCN1-TH4T are dedicated connectors for CompoBus/S. Always use dedicated CompoBus/S cables with these connectors. Do not locate the cables in places where excessive force may be imposed on the connectors of the cables such as an area where cables may entangle feet. These connectors cannot be reused once they have been attached to cables. Use new connectors if they were not attached to cables properly. Refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual (W266) to assemble the connectors. CompoBus/S CompoBus/S 87 Ordering Information Note: Abbreviations for standards: U: UL, C: CSA, CE: EC Directive Product Appearance Model Specifications Standards Master Control Units SRM1-C01-V2 Stand-alone model with built-in controller functions (without RS-232C) UL CSA CE (see SRM1-C02-V2 Stand-alone model with built-in controller functions and RS-232C note 2) Master Units C200HW-SRM21-V1 For C200HX (-ZE), C200HG (-ZE), C200HE (-ZE), and C200HS CQM1-SRM21-V1 For CQM1 SYSMAC Boards C200PC-ISA02-SRM C200PC-ISA12-SRM For C200HX/HG/HE --- I/O Link Unit CPM1A-SRT21 8 inputs 8 outputs UL CSA CE (see note 2) Remote Terminals (Transistor Models) SRT1-ID04 SRT1-ID04-1 SRT2-ID08 SRT2-ID08-1 SRT2-ID16 SRT2-ID16-1 SRT1-OD04 SRT1-OD04-1 SRT2-OD08 SRT2-OD08-1 SRT2-OD16 SRT2-OD16-1 4 transistor input (NPN) 4 transistor inputs (PNP) 8 transistor inputs (NPN) 8 transistor inputs (PNP) 16 transistor inputs (NPN) 16 transistor inputs (PNP) 4 transistor outputs (NPN) 4 transistor outputs (PNP) 8 transistor outputs (NPN) 8 transistor outputs (PNP) 16 transistor outputs (NPN) 16 transistor outputs (PNP) Remote Terminals (M3 Terminal Block Models) SRT1-ID16T SRT1-ID16T-1 SRT2-MD16T SRT2-MD16T-1 SRT2-OD16T SRT2-OD16T-1 16 transistor inputs (NPN) 16 transistor inputs (PNP) 16 transistor I/O points (NPN) 16 transistor I/O points (PNP) 16 transistor outputs (NPN) 16 transistor outputs (PNP) CE (see note 2) Remote Terminals (Relay-mounted Models) SRT2-ROC08 SRT2-ROC16 SRT2-ROF08 SRT2-ROF16 8 relay outputs 16 relay outputs 8 power MOS FET relay outputs 16 power MOS FET relay outputs UL CSA CE (see note 2) Connector Terminals SRT2-VID08S SRT2-VID08S-1 SRT2-VOD08S SRT2-VOD08S-1 SRT2-VID16ML SRT2-VID16ML-1 SRT2-VOD16ML SRT2-VOD16ML-1 SRT2-ATT01 SRT2-ATT02 8 transistor input (NPN) 8 transistor inputs (PNP) 8 transistor outputs (NPN) 8 transistor outputs (PNP) 16 transistor inputs (NPN) 16 transistor inputs (PNP) 16 transistor outputs (NPN) 16 transistor outputs (PNP) Mounting hook A Mounting hook B CE (see note 2) Sensor Terminals SRT1-ID08S SRT1-ND08S SRT1-OD08S 8 inputs (NPN) 4 automatic teaching points (NPN) 8 outputs --- CompoBus/S CompoBus/S 88 Product Standards Appearance Model Specifications Sensor Amplifier Terminals for CompoBus/S SRT1-TID04S SRT1-TKD04S SRT1-XID04S SRT1-XKD04S --- --- E3X-N Connector Type E3X-NH16 E3X-NT16 E3X-NT26 Long-distance, high-precision, 1 channel General-purpose, 1 channel Multi-functional, 1 channel E3X-NM16 Multi-functional, 4 channels Terminal Block Unit E39-JID01 One input point Analog Input Terminal SRT2-AD04 1 to 4 inputs (set with DIP switch) CE (see note 2) Analog Output Terminal SRT2-DA02 1 or 2 outputs (set with DIP switch) Remote I/O Modules SRT1-ID16P SRT1-OD16P --- --- Position Drivers FND-X06H-SRT 200-VAC input, momentary maximum output current: 6.0 A FND-X12H-SRT 200-VAC input, momentary maximum output current: 12 A FND-X25H-SRT 200-VAC input, momentary maximum output current: 25 A FND-X06L-SRT 100-VAC input, momentary maximum output current: 6.0 A FND-X12L-SRT 100-VAC input, momentary maximum output current: 12 A Branch Connector Extension Connector Connector Terminator SCN1-TH4 SCN1-TH4E SCN1-TH4T --- Flat Cable SCA1-4F10 100 m Terminal-block Terminator SRS1-T --- Note: 1. Refer to the C200HS Catalog (P32). Refer to the C200HX/C200HG/C200HE (-ZE) Catalog 2. Information on EC Directives Individual OMRON products that comply with EC Directives conform to the common emission standards of EMC Directives. However, the emission characteristics of these products installed on customers’ equipment may vary depending on the configuration, wiring, layout, and other conditions of the control panel used. For this reason, customers are requested to check whether the emission characteristics of the entire machine or equipment comply with the EMC Directives. CompoBus/S CompoBus/S 89 Model Number Legend SRT􀀀-􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀􀀀 2 3 4 5 6 7 -1 1 1. Communications Mode 1: High-speed communications mode 2: High-speed/Long-distance communications mode 2. I/O Module Replacement None: Impossible R: Possible (Relays and power MOS FET relays) 3. I/O Specifications I: Input O: Output N: Input and output (with remote teaching) AD: Analog input DA: Analog output 4. I/O Voltage Specifications D: DC C: AC/DC (contact type) F: AC/DC (power MOS FET type) 5. I/O Points 04: 4 points 08: 8 points 16: 16 points 6. I/O Connection Method None: Screw terminals S: Connector P: PCB terminals 7. None: NPN -1: PNP CompoBus/S CompoBus/S 90 Notes: Cat. No. Q103-E1-6 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan 0200-8C (0796) a Authorized Distributor: OMRON Corporation Systems Components Division 66 Matsumoto Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511 Japan Tel: (81)559-77-9633/Fax: (81)559-77-9097 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 OMRON ELECTRONICS, INC. 1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173 U.S.A. Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568 OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. 83 Clemenceau Avenue, #11-01, UE Square, Singapore 239920 Tel: (65)835-3011/Fax: (65)835-2711 The essential guide Harmony Control and Signalling units 2013 Control and signalling units Harmony, simple and innovative solutions for your applications World leader in control and signalling components, Schneider Electric continues its policy of innovation within the Harmony ranges in order to perfect the efficiency of your dialogue solutions. Invest with complete peace of mind! The right solution for your application An offer unrivalled in content and complementarity Optimised cost saving solutions due to increased flexibility of the offers, enabling multiple combinations and full compatibility Quality you can rely on Robust products that comply to the highest quality standards Valuable time that you save Simple selection and quick installation for all Harmony components This document is a selection of the top selling products. For more information: http://www.schneider-electric.com Contents Pushbuttons, switches, pilot lights and control stations Ø 16, plastic bezel, Harmony XB6 .......................................................................................... 2 to 4 Ø 8 and 12, pilot lights, Harmony XVL .......................................................................................... 5 Ø 22, metal bezel, Harmony XB4 / Control stations Harmony XAP ...................................... 6 to 9 Ø 22, plastic bezel, Harmony XB5 / Control stations Harmony XAL ................................. 10 to 13 Ø 22, plastic bezel, wireless and batteryless, Harmony XB5R ........................................... 14 to 15 Ø 22, plastic bezel - Monolithic, Harmony XB7 .................................................................. 16 to 17 Ø 30, metal and plastic bezel, Harmony 9001K, 9001SK .................................................. 18 to 20 Cam switches Harmony K series ............................................................................................................... 21 to 22 Signalling solutions Ø 40, 60, 100 mm monolithic tower lights, Harmony XVC ........................................................... 23 Ø 45 mm monolithic beacons and tower lights, accessories, Harmony XVDLS / XVC ............... 24 Ø 70 mm modular tower lights (IP 66), Harmony XVB ................................................................ 25 Ø 70 mm modular tower lights (up to IP 54), Harmony XVE ....................................................... 26 Ø 45, 50 mm modular tower lights (up to IP 54), Harmony XVM / XVP ...................................... 27 Modular tower lights accessories, Harmony XV .......................................................................... 28 Ø 84, 106, 120, 130 mm rotating mirror beacons, Harmony XVR ............................................... 29 Accessories for rotating mirror beacons, Harmony XVR ............................................................. 30 Electronic alarms and multisound sirens, Harmony XVS ............................................................ 30 Components for hoisting applications Pendant control stations, Harmony XAC ............................................................................ 31 to 32 Illuminated pushbuttons Type of head Flush push Shape of head rectangular (2) Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4, 4X, 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 16.2 mounting centres 24 x 18 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 with square or circular head Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (below head) 24 x 18 x 50 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 x 50 with square or circular head Connection (3) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering Type of push Spring return Complete products 12 … 24 V AC/DC Products for user assembly References white NO XB6DW1B1B ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DW1 NO + NC XB6DW1B5B ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW1 green NO XB6DW3B1B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DW3 NO + NC XB6DW3B5B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW3 red NC XB6DW4B2B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z2B ZB6DW4 NO + NC XB6DW4B5B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW4 yellow NO – ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DW5 NO + NC XB6DW5B5B ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DW5 Type of push Latching References white NO – ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DF1 NO + NC XB6DF1B5B ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF1 green NO XB6DF3B1B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DF3 NO + NC XB6DF3B5B ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF3 red NC XB6DF4B2B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z2B ZB6DF4 NO + NC XB6DF4B5B ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF4 yellow NO – ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z1B ZB6DF5 NO + NC – ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DF5 Pilot lights Type of head Smooth lens cap Shape of head rectangular (2) Complete products Products for user assembly 12 … 24 V AC/DC References white XB6DV1BB ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6DV1 green XB6DV3BB ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6DV3 red XB6DV4BB ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6DV4 yellow XB6DV5BB ZB6Ep5B (1) ZB6DV5 blue – ZB6Ep6B (1) ZB6DV6 (1) Basic reference, to be completed by the letter B, G or M indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above. (2) For products with a square head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter C (XB6DW1B1B becomes XB6CW1B1B). For products with a circular head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter A (XB6DW1B1B becomes XB6AW1B1B). (3) Alternative connection: 1 x 0.5 pins for printed circuit boards. Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 16 with plastic bezel Contact functions and light functions with integral LED (1): Voltage Letter (p) 12…24 V AC/DC (15 mA) B 48…120 V AC (25 mA) G 230…240 V AC (25 mA) M + 0.2 0 Harmony XB6 = + + = + Pushbuttons Type of head Flush push Shape of head rectangular (1) Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4, 4X, 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 16.2 mounting centres 24 x 18 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 with square or circular head Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (below head) 24 x 18 x 50 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 x 50 with square or circular head Connection (2) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering Type of push Spring return Complete products Products for user assembly References white NO XB6DA11B ZB6Z1B ZB6DA1 NO + NC XB6DA15B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA1 black NO – ZB6Z1B ZB6DA2 NO + NC XB6DA25B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA2 green NO XB6DA31B ZB6Z2B ZB6DA3 NO + NC XB6DA35B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA3 red NO – ZB6Z1B ZB6DA4 NO + NC XB6DA45B ZB6Z5B ZB6DA4 (1) For products with a square head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter C (XB6DA11B becomes XB6CA11B). For products with a circular head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter A (XB6DA11B becomes XB6AA11B). (2) Alternative connection: 1 x 0.5 pins for printed circuit boards. Ø 30 mushroom head Emergency stop pushbuttons (3) Type of head Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850) Shape of head cylindrical Type of push Turn to release Complete products Products for user assembly References red 2 NC + 1 NO XB6AS8349B ZB6E2B ZB6Z5B ZB6AS834 Type of push Key release, 200 References red 2 NC + 1 NO XB6AS9349B ZB6E2B ZB6Z5B ZB6AS934 (3) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. + 0.2 0 Contact functions = + = + + Selector switches and key switches Type of head Black handle Shape of head rectangular (2) Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4, 4X, 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 16.2 mounting centres 24 x 18 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 with square or circular head Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (below head) 24 x 18 x 50 with rectangular head, 18 x 18 x 50 with square or circular head Connection (3) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering Type of operator Black handle Complete products Products for user assembly Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions stay put stay put spring return to centre References NO XB6DD221B ZB6Z1B ZB6DD22 ZB6Z1B ZB6DD24 NO + NC XB6DD225B ZB6Z5B ZB6DD22 ZB6Z5B ZB6DD24 Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions stay put stay put spring return to centre References NO XB6DD235B ZB6Z5B ZB6DD23 ZB6Z5B ZB6DD25 Type of operator Key, n° 200 Complete products Products for user assembly Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions stay put stay put spring return to centre References NO + NC XB6DGC5B ZB6Z5B ZB6DGC ZB6Z5B ZB6DGB Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions stay put stay put spring return to centre References NO + NC XB6DGH5B ZB6Z5B ZB6DGH ZB6Z5B ZB6DGS Illuminated selector switches Type of operator Coloured handle Products for user assembly Number and type of positions 2 positions 3 positions stay put stay put References white NO + NC ZB6Ep1B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DD02 ZB6DD03 ZB6YK1 green NO + NC ZB6Ep3B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DD02 ZB6DD03 ZB6YK3 red NO + NC ZB6Ep4B (1) ZB6Z5B ZB6DD02 ZB6DD03 ZB6YK4 (1) Basic reference, to be completed by the letter B, G or M indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above. (2) For products with a square head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter C (XB6DD221B becomes XB6CD221B). For products with a circular head, replace the letter D in the reference by the letter A (XB6DD221B becomes XB6AD221B). (3) Alternative connection: 1 x 0.5 pins for printed circuit boards. (1): Voltage Letter (p) 12…24 V AC/DC (15 mA) B 48…120 V AC (25 mA) G 230…240 V AC (25 mA) M + 0.2 0 Harmony XB6 60° 60° 45° 60° 60° 60° 60° 45° 45° 70° 70° 45° 70° 70° 70° 70° 45° 45° 60° 60° 60° Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 16 with plastic bezel Contact functions and light functions with integral LED = + = + = + + LED pilot lights With black bezel With integral lens cap Type of head Protruding LED, Ø 8 mm Covered LED, Ø 8 mm Covered LED, Ø 12 mm Degree of protection IP 40, IP 65 with seal (2) Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 8.2 mm Ø 8.2 mm Ø 12.2 mm mounting centres 12.5 x 12.5 mm 10.5 x 10.5 mm 16.5 x 16.5 mm Dimensions (mm) Ø x Depth (below head) Ø 12 x 32 Ø 10 x 34 Ø 16 x 45 Connection Tags (3) Tags (3) Threaded connectors References (1) green XVLA1p3 XVLA2p3 XVLA3p3 red XVLA1p4 XVLA2p4 XVLA3p4 yellow XVLA1p5 XVLA2p5 XVLA3p5 Tightening key For Ø 8 mm pilot lights For Ø 12 mm pilot lights References XVLX08 XVLX12 (1) Basic reference, to be completed by the number 1, 2, 3 or 4 indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above. (2) For an IP 65 degree of protection, include the seals: XVLZ911 for pilot lights XVLA1pp and XVLA2pp; XVLZ912 for pilot lights XVLA3pp. (3) Tags for 2.8 x 0.5 Faston connectors or for soldering. Sub-assemblies & accessories for Ø 16 plastic bezel control and signalling units Sub-assemblies Bodies for pushbuttons and selector switches Bodies for pilot lights Rated operational characteristics, AC-15: Ue = 240 V and Ie = 1.5 A or Ue = 120 V and Ie = 3 A Consumption Positive operation of contacts conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1: NC contacts with positive opening operation, 15 mA 12…24 V AC/DC positive opening force 20 N 25 mA 48…120 V AC 25 mA 230…240 V AC Type of Fixing collar Contacts Pilot light 12 … 24 V 48 … 120 V 230 … 240 V contact + contacts bodies References NO ZB6Z1B ZB6E1B White ZB6EB1B ZB6EG1B ZB6EM1B NC ZB6Z2B ZB6E2B Green ZB6EB3B ZB6EG3B ZB6EM3B 2 NO ZB6Z3B – Red ZB6EB4B ZB6EG4B ZB6EM4B 2 NC ZB6Z4B – Yellow ZB6EB5B ZB6EG5B ZB6EM5B NO + NC ZB6Z5B – Blue ZB6EB6B ZB6EG6B ZB6EM6B LED pilot lights Ø 8 and 12 (1): Voltage Number (p) 5 V (25 mA) 1 12 V (18 mA) 2 24 V (18 mA) 3 48 V (10 mA) 4 Accessories Legend holders 24 x 28 mm (8 x 21 mm legend) 24 x 36 mm (16 x 21 mm legend) Blank legend Background colour without legend yellow or white black or red without legend yellow or white black or red References (10)* ZB6YD20 ZB6YD21 ZB6YD22 ZB6YD30 ZB6YD31 ZB6YD32 Blank legends for legend holders 8 x 21 mm (24 x 28 mm legend holder) 16 x 21 mm (24 x 36 mm legend holder) Background colour – yellow or white black or red – yellow or white black or red References (20)* – ZB6Y1001 ZB6Y2001 – ZB6Y4001 ZB6Y3001 Ø 45 mm yellow legend for mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton Marking Blank, for engraving EMERGENCY STOP ARRET D’URGENCE References ZB6Y7001 ZB6Y7330 ZB6Y7130 Body/fixing collar Plate Tightening tool Dismantling tool anti-rotation and slackening, for fixing nut for removal of contact blocks References ZB6Y009 (10)* ZB6Y003 (10)* ZB6Y905 (2)* ZB6Y018 (5)* Protective shutter for pushbuttons and switches Connector Blanking plug for rectangular heads for circular and square heads Faston, female IP 65 References ZB6YD001 ZB6YA001 ZB6Y004 (100)* ZB6Y005 (10)* * sold in lots of Harmony XVL Pushbuttons, spring return Type of head Chromium plated circular bezel Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class I Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Depth (mm) below head 43 Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals Type of push Flush Flush, booted Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly References black NO XB4BA21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA2 XB4BP21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP2 green NO XB4BA31 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA3 XB4BP31 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP3 red NC XB4BA42 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BA4 XB4BP42 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BP4 yellow NO XB4BA51 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA5 XB4BP51 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP5 blue NO XB4BA61 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA6 XB4BP61 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BP6 Type of push Flush With international marking Products Complete For user assembly References green NO XB4BA3311 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA331 – – – red NC XB4BA4322 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BA432 – – – white NO XB4BA3341 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA334 – – – black NO XB4BA3351 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BA335 _ _ _ Type of push Projecting Mushroom head, Ø 40 mm Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly References black NO – – – XB4BC21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BC2 red NC XB4BL42 ZB4BZ102 ZB4BL4 – – – Type of push Double-headed pushbuttons Triple-headed pushbuttons Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66 - IP 69K With international marking Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly (A) (B) References (A) NO + NC XB4BL73415 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BL7341 – – – (B) NO + NC + NO – – – XB4BA711237 ZB4BZ103 + ZBE102 ZB4BA71123 (1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8). Ø 40 mm mushroom head Emergency stop pushbuttons (2) Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850) Type of push Push-pull NO + NC Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly References red NO + NC XB4BT845 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BT84 Type of push Turn to release NO + NC References red NO + NC XB4BS8445 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BS844 Type of push Key release NO + NC References red NO + NC XB4BS9445 ZB4BZ105 ZB4BS944 (2) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Harmony XB4 + 0.4 0 Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22 with metal bezel Contact functions + = + = + Contact functions Selector switches and key switches Type of head Chromium plated circular bezel Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class I Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Depth (mm) below head 43 Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals Type of operator Key, n° 455 Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly Number and type of positions (2) 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions stay put stay put stay put stay put References black NO XB4BG21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BG2 XB4BG41 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BG4 Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 3 positions 3 positions spring return to left spring return to left stay put stay put References black NO XB4BG61 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BG6 – – – black NO + NO – – – XB4BG33 ZB4BZ103 ZB4BG3 + 0.4 0 Type of operator Handle Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions stay put stay put spring return to left spring return to left References black NO XB4BD21 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BD2 XB4BD41 ZB4BZ101 ZB4BD4 Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions stay put stay put spring return to centre spring return to centre References black NO + NO XB4BD33 ZB4BZ103 ZB4BD3 XB4BD53 ZB4BZ103 ZB4BD5 = + = + Type Double-headed pushbuttons with LED pilot light Illuminated selector switches (1 flush green push, 1 projecting red push) (2 position stay put) Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66 Light source Integral LED Integral LED Products Complete Complete Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC References green NO + NC – – – XB4BK123B5 XB4BK123G5 XB4BK123M5 red NO + NC – – – XB4BK124B5 XB4BK124G5 XB4BK124M5 orange NO + NC – – – XB4BK125B5 XB4BK125G5 XB4BK125M5 White NO + NC XB4BW73731B5 XB4BW73731G5 XB4BW73731M5 – – – (1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8), spring clamp terminal. Harmony XB4 Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22 with metal bezel Light functions Pilot lights Type of head Circular bezel Smooth lens cap Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class I Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Depth below head 43 Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included) Products Complete Complete For user assembly Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max. References white XB4BVB1 XB4BVG1 XB4BVM1 XB4BV61 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV01 green XB4BVB3 XB4BVG3 XB4BVM3 XB4BV63 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV03 red XB4BVB4 XB4BVG4 XB4BVM4 XB4BV64 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV04 yellow XB4BVB5 XB4BVG5 XB4BVM5 XB4BV65 ZB4BV6 ZB4BV05 blue XB4BVB6 XB4BVG6 XB4BVM6 – – – + 0.4 0 Illuminated pushbuttons and selector switches Type Flush push, spring return, illuminated pushbuttons Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included) Products Complete Complete For user assembly Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max. References white NO + NC XB4BW31B5 XB4BW31G5 XB4BW31M5 XB4BW3165 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW31 green NO + NC XB4BW33B5 XB4BW33G5 XB4BW33M5 XB4BW3365 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW33 red NO + NC XB4BW34B5 XB4BW34G5 XB4BW34M5 XB4BW3465 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW34 orange NO + NC XB4BW35B5 XB4BW35G5 XB4BW35M5 XB4BW3565 ZB4BW065 ZB4BW35 blue NO + NC XB4BW36B5 XB4BW36G5 XB4BW36M5 – – – = + = + Separate components and accessories Electrical blocks (1) (2) Single contact blocks Light blocks with integral LED Light block, direct supply Rated operational characteristics AC-15, 240 V - 3 A Consumption 18 mA 24 V AC/DC Positive operation of contacts NC contacts with positive opening operation 14 mA 120 V AC conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 14 mA 240 V AC Screw clamp terminal Spring clamp terminal To combine with heads for integral LED For BA 9s bulb (not included) 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max. References (5)* NC ZBE101 ZBE1015 white ZBVB1 ZBVG1 ZBVM1 ZBV6 NO ZBE102 ZBE1025 green ZBVB3 ZBVG3 ZBVM3 Colour provided by lens red ZBVB4 ZBVG4 ZBVM4 orange ZBVB5 ZBVG5 ZBVM5 blue ZBVB6 ZBVG6 ZBVM6 Diecast metal enclosures (Zinc alloy, usable depth 49 mm) 1 vertical row 2 vertical rows Number of cut-outs Front face dimensions 1 2 3 4 2 4 6 References 80 x 80 mm XAPM1201 – – – XAPM1202 – – 80 x 130 mm – XAPM2202 XAPM2203 – – XAPM2204 – 80 x 175 mm – – XAPM3203 XAPM3204 – – XAPM3206 Accessories (2) Legend holders, 30 x 40 mm, for 8 x 27 mm legends Marking Background colour: black or red white or yellow References (10)* Blank ZBY2101 ZBY4101 International 0 (red background) ZBY2931 I ZBY2147 AUTO ZBY2115 STOP ZBY2304 – English OFF ZBY2312 ON ZBY2311 START ZBY2303 – – French ARRET (red b/grnd) ZBY2104 ARRET-MARCHE ZBY2166 MARCHE ZBY2103 – – German AUS ZBY2204 AUS-EIN ZBY2266 EIN ZBY2203 – – Spanish PARADA (red b/grnd) ZBY2404 PARADA-MARCHA ZBY2466 MARCHA ZBY2403 – – Legend holders, 30 x 50 mm, for 18 x 27 mm legends Background colour black or red white or yellow References (10)* Blank ZBY6101 ZBY6102 Ø 60 mm legend for mushroom head Emergency stop pushbutton Background colour yellow Marking Blank EMERGENCY STOP ARRET D’URGENCE NOT HALT PARADA DE EMERGENCIA References ZBY9140 ZBY9330 ZBY9130 ZBY9230 ZBY9430 (1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8), spring clamp terminal. (2) Electrical blocks and accessories also for use with Harmony XB5 plastic range * sold in lots of Type of push Double-headed pushbuttons Triple-headed pushbuttons Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66 - IP 69K With international marking Products Complete (A) For user assembly Complete (B) For user assembly References (A) NO + NC XB5AL73415 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AL7341 – – – (B) NO + NC + NO – – – XB5AA711237 ZB5AZ103 + ZBE102 ZB5AA71123 (1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8). Harmony XB5 Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22 with plastic bezel Contact functions Pushbuttons, spring return Type of head Circular bezel Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Depth (mm) below head 43 Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals + 0.4 0 Type of push Flush Flush, booted Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly References black NO XB5AA21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA2 XB5AP21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP2 green NO XB5AA31 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA3 XB5AP31 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP3 red NC XB5AA42 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AA4 XB5AP42 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AP4 yellow NO XB5AA51 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA5 XB5AP51 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP5 blue NO XB5AA61 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA6 XB5AP61 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AP6 Type of push Flush With international marking Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly References green NO XB5AA3311 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA331 – – – red NC XB5AA4322 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AA432 – – – white NO XB5AA3341 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA334 – – – black NO XB5AA3351 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AA335 – – – Type of push Projecting Mushroom head, Ø 40 mm Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly References black NO – – – XB5AC21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AC2 red NC XB5AL42 ZB5AZ102 ZB5AL4 – – – Ø 40 mm mushroom head Emergency stop pushbuttons (2) Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850) Type of push Push-pull NO + NC Unmarked Products Complete For user assembly References red NO + NC XB5AT845 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AT84 Type of push Turn to release NO + NC References red NO + NC XB5AS8445 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AS844 Type of push Key release NO + NC References red NO + NC XB5AS9445 ZB5AZ105 ZB5AS944 (2) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850: to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. + = + = + 10 Contact functions Selector switches and key switches Type of head Circular bezel Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Depth (mm) below head 43 Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals Type of operator Handle Products Complete For user assembly Complete For user assembly Number and type of positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions stay put stay put spring return to left spring return to left References black NO XB5AD21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AD2 XB5AD41 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AD4 Number and type of positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions 3 positions stay put stay put spring return to centre spring return to centre References black NO + NO XB5AD33 ZB5AZ103 ZB5AD3 XB5AD53 ZB5AZ103 ZB5AD5 Type of operator Key, n° 455 Number and type of positions (2) 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions 2 positions stay put stay put stay put stay put References black NO XB5AG21 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AG2 XB5AG41 ZB5AZ101 ZB5AG4 (2) The symbol indicates key withdrawal position. + 0.4 0 = + 11 Harmony XB5 Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22 with plastic bezel Light functions Pilot lights Type of head Circular bezel Smooth lens cap Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 4X, 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.5 (22.4 recommended) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Depth below head 43 Connection (1) Screw clamp terminals Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included) Products Complete Complete For user assembly Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max. References white XB5AVB1 XB5AVG1 XB5AVM1 XB5AV61 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV01 green XB5AVB3 XB5AVG3 XB5AVM3 XB5AV63 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV03 red XB5AVB4 XB5AVG4 XB5AVM4 XB5AV64 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV04 orange XB5AVB5 XB5AVG5 XB5AVM5 XB5AV65 ZB5AV6 ZB5AV05 blue XB5AVB6 XB5AVG6 XB5AVM6 – – – Illuminated pushbuttons and selector switches Type Flush push, spring return, illuminated pushbuttons Light source Integral LED Direct supply for BA 9s bulb (not included) Products Complete Complete For user assembly Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 250 V max., 2.4 W max. References white NO + NC XB5AW31B5 XB5AW31G5 XB5AW31M5 XB5AW3165 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW31 green NO + NC XB5AW33B5 XB5AW33G5 XB5AW33M5 XB5AW3365 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW33 red NO + NC XB5AW34B5 XB5AW34G5 XB5AW34M5 XB5AW3465 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW34 orange NO + NC XB5AW35B5 XB5AW35G5 XB5AW35M5 XB5AW3565 ZB5AW065 ZB5AW35 blue NO + NC XB5AW36B5 XB5AW36G5 XB5AW36M5 – – – Type Double-headed pushbuttons with LED pilot light Illuminated selector switches (1 flush green push, 1 projecting red push) (2 position stay put) Degree of protection IP 66 - IP 69K IP 66 Light source Integral LED Integral LED Products Complete Complete Supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC 24 V AC/DC 110…120 V AC 230…240 V AC References green NO + NC – – – XB5AK123B5 XB5AK123G5 XB5AK123M5 red NO + NC – – – XB5AK124B5 XB5AK124G5 XB5AK124M5 orange NO + NC – – – XB5AK125B5 XB5AK125G5 XB5AK125M5 white NO + NC XB5AW73731B5 XB5AW73731G5 XB5AW73731M5 – – – (1) Alternative connections: plug-in connector, Faston connectors (6.35 and 2 x 2.8), spring clamp terminal. + 0.4 0 = + = + 12 Separate components and accessories: see page 9. Control stations For XB5 pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22 with plastic bezel Harmony XAL (1) Empty enclosures: Basic reference: XALK0p, replace the p by the number of cut-outs required (see cut-out table above) (1): Number of cut-outs Number (p) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 Complete stations with 1 pushbutton, selector switch or key switch (light grey RAL 7035 base with dark grey RAL 7016 lid) Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4X and 13 / Class II Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 68 x 68 x 113 max. (with key release Ø 40 mushroom head pushbutton) Fixing (mm) 2 x Ø 4.3 on 54 mm centres Function 1 Start or Stop function 1 Start-Stop function Marking On spring return push On legend holder and legend below head Number and type of pushbutton/selector switch/key switch 1 flush green p/b 1 flush red p/b 1 projecting red p/b 1 2 position stay put selector switch or key switch Black handle Key n° 455 (key withdrawal LH pos.) References NO I XALD102 – – – – Start XALD103 – – – – O - I – – – XALD134 XALD144 O – XALD112 XALD115 – – Function Emergency stop (2) (light grey RAL 7035 base with yellow RAL 1012 lid) Number and type of mushroom head pushbutton 1 red Ø 40 head, turn to release 1 red Ø 40 head, key release Latching mechanism Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850) Trigger action (EN/ISO 13850) References NC XALK178 XALK188 NC + NC XALK178F XALK188F NO + NC XALK178E XALK188E NC + NC + NO XALK178G XALK188G (2) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. (1) Empty enclosures: Basic reference: XALD0p, replace the p by the number of cut-outs required (see cut-out table above) Complete stations with 2 and 3 pushbuttons or 2 pushbuttons + 1 pilot light (light grey RAL 7035 base with dark grey RAL 7016 lid) Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 2-way control stations: 68 x 106 x 62; 3-way control stations: 68 x 136 x 87 Fixing (mm) 2-way control stations: 2 x Ø 4.3 on 54 x 68 centres; 3-way control stations: 2 x Ø 4.3 on 54 x 98 centres Function Start-Stop functions 2 functions 3 functions Marking On spring return push Number and type of pushbutton/pilot light 1 flush green p/b 1 flush green pushbutton 1 flush white p/b 1 flush white p/b 1 flush white p/b 1 flush red p/b 1 flush red pushbutton 1 flush black p/b 1 flush red p/b 1 Ø 30 red mush- 1 red pilot light with integral LED 1 flush black p/b room head p/b 1 flush black p/b 24 V AC/DC 230 V AC References NO + NC I - O XALD213 XALD363B XALD363M – – – Start - Stop XALD215 – – – – – NO + NO – – – XALD222 – – NO + NC + NO – – – – XALD324 XALD328 Accessories Standard contact blocks Light blocks with integral LED, colour red Description NO contact NC contact 24 V AC/DC 230 V AC References ZENL1111 ZENL1121 ZALVB4 ZALVM4 13 Harmony XB5R Wireless and batteryless pushbuttons Packages and components Ready to use packs Panel mounting Mobile application Wireless and batteryless 22mm pushbutton assembled on fixing collar Plastic head Metal head Plastic head Metal head Plastic head in handy box Caps 1 black cap 1 set of 10 different coloured caps 1 black cap 1 set of 10 different coloured caps Receiver Non configurable Configurable functions: monostable, bistable, stop/start Non configurable Configurable functions: monostable, bistable, stop/start Relay output 1relay output type RT 3A 2 relays output type RT 3A 1relay output type RT 3A 2 relays output type RT 3A Voltage receiver 24 VDC 24….240 AC/DC 24 VDC 24….240 AC/DC References XB5RFB01 XB4RFB01 XB5RFA02 XB4RFA02 XB5RMB03 XB5RMA04 The pushbutton and receiver are factory paired Transmitter components for wireless and batteryless pushbuttons Plastic mushroom head Plastic head Metal head Wireless and batteryless pushbuttons including - a transmitter fitted with fixing collar - a spring return pushbutton head with clipped-in cap Reference Cap colour White – ZB5RTA1 ZB4RTA1 Black – ZB5RTA2 ZB4RTA2 Green – ZB5RTA3 ZB4RTA3 White I on green background – ZB5RTA331 ZB4RTA331 Red – ZB5RTA4 ZB4RTA4 White O on red background – ZB5RTA432 ZB4RTA432 Yellow – ZB5RTA5 ZB4RTA5 Blue – ZB5RTA6 ZB4RTA6 Black ZB5RTC2 – – Transmitter components for wireless and batteryless rope pull switch Rope pull switch with wireless and batteryless transmitter Reference ZBRP1 14 Components and accessories Configurable receivers Description - 2 buttons (learn, parameter setting) - 6 indicating LEDs (power ON, outputs, signal strenght) Output function Monostable Monostable, bistable Monostable, bistable, stop/start Output type 4 PNP outputs 200 mA / 24V 2 relay outputs type RT 3A Receiver voltage 24 VDC 24….240 AC/DC References ZBRRC ZBRRD ZBRRA Configurable access point (1) Description - 7-segment display - jog dial - 8 indicating LEDs (power ON, functions mode, communication status, signal strength) - external antenna connector and protective plug Output function Monostable Output type 2 RS485 for Modbus RS485 serial line 1 slot for communication module ZBRCETH Receiver voltage 24….240 AC/DC References ZBRN2 ZBRN1 (1) Available 1st quarter 2013. Complementary accessories Relay antennas Communication module Plastic empty boxes Description 1 power-ON LED 2 LEDs reception / transmission 1 RF connector Modbus/TCP protocol 2 RJ45 connectors Handy, 1 cut-out 1 cut-out 2 cut-outs Cable lenght 5m 2m Voltage 24….240 AC/DC Reference ZBRA1 ZBRA2 (1) ZBRCETH (1) ZBRM01 XALD01 XALD02 (1) Available 1st quarter 2013. 15 Pushbuttons Type of head Flush or projecting push circular Degree of protection IP 65, class II, NEMA type 3 and 12 Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.4 (0 +0.1) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Dimensions (mm) Ø x Depth (below head) Ø 29 x 41.5 (Ø 40 x 41.5 for Emergency stop) Connection Screw clamp terminals, 1 x 0.34 mm2 to 1 x 1.5 mm2 Type of push Flush, spring return Flush, push and latching References (10)* white NO XB7NA11 – NO + NC XB7NA15 – black NO XB7NA21 XB7NH21 NO + NC XB7NA25 XB7NH25 green NO XB7NA31 XB7NH31 NO + NC XB7NA35 XB7NH35 red NC XB7NA42 – NO + NC XB7NA45 – yellow NO XB7NA81 – Type of push Flush, spring return Projecting, spring return References green NO XB7NA3131 – red NC – XB7NL4232 white NO XB7NA11341 – black NO XB7NA21341 – NO + NC XB7NA25341 – Selector switches and key switches Type of operator Black handle Key, n° 455 Number and type of positions 2 positions 3 positions 2 positions 3 positions stay put stay put stay put stay put References (10*) NO XB7ND21 – XB7NG21 – NO + NC XB7ND25 – – – 2 NO – XB7ND33 – XB7NG33 Ø 40mm Emmergency Stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons (EN/ISO 13850, UL) (1) Type of push Turn to release Push, Pull Key release (n° 455) References* red NC XB7 NS8442 XB7 NT842 - red NO + NC XB7 NS8445 XB7 NT845 XB7 NS9445 red 2NC XB7 NS8444 XB7 NT844 XB7 NS9444 (1) Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and to standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Please consult your Customer Care Centre for a full explanation of these standards and directives. * Sold in lots of 10. Harmony XB7 Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 22 with plastic bezel - Monolithic Contact functions 16 Illuminated pushbuttons Type of head Projecting push circular Degree of protection IP 65, class II, NEMA type 12 Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 22.4 (0 +0.1) mounting centres 30 (horizontal) x 40 (vertical) Dimensions (mm) Ø x Depth (below head) Ø 29 x 41.5, (Ø 40 x 41.5 for Emergency stop) Connection Screw clamp terminals, 1 x 0.34 mm2 to 1 x 1.5 mm2 Light source Integral LED BA 9s base fitting Incandescent bulb direct supply (bulb not included) Type of push Spring return References (10)* green NO XB7NW33p1 (1) XB7NW3361 red NO XB7NW34p1 (1) XB7NW3461 NC XB7NW34p2 (1) _ orange NO XB7NW35p1 (1) – blue NO XB7NW36p1 (1) – clear NO XB7NW37p1 (1) – yellow NO XB7NW38p1 (1) XB7NW3561 Type of push Push and latching References (10)* green NO XB7NH03p1 (1) XB7NH0361 red NO XB7NH04p1 (1) XB7NH0461 NC XB7NH04p2 (1) – yellow NO XB7NH08p1 (1) XB7NH0861 Pilot lights (2) Light source Integral LED Ba 9s base fitting incandescent bulb Incandescent bulb direct supply direct through resistor (bulb not included) (bulb included) Supply voltage 24VAC/DC or 120VAC or 230…240VAC 6 or 24 V DC, or 130 V AC 230 V AC References (10)* clear XB7EV07pP (1) XB7EV67P XB7EV77P green XB7EV03pP (1) XB7EV63P XB7EV73P red XB7EV04pP (1) XB7EV64P XB7EV74P yellow XB7EV05pP (1) XB7EV65P XB7EV75P blue XB7EV06pP (1) XB7EV66P XB7EV76P orange XB7EV08pP (1) XB7EV68P XB7EV78P Incandescent bulbs, long life BA 9s base fitting, Ø 11 mm max., length 28 mm max. 6 V (1.2 W) 24 V (2 W) 130 V (2.4 W) References DL1CB006 DL1CE024 DL1CE130 (1) Basic reference, to be completed by the letter B, G or M indicating the required voltage. See voltage table above. (2) Alternative connection: 1 x 6.35 and 2 x 2.8 mm Faston connectors. * sold in lots of 10 Contact functions and light functions (1): Supply voltage for integral LED light source only Letter (p) 24 V AC/DC B 120 V AC G 230 V AC M 17 Pushbuttons, spring return Type of push Flush Projecting Projecting (high guard) Colour of push Multi-colour (set of 7 clip-in coloured caps) Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31 mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp) Depth below head (mm) 42 Connection Screw clamp terminals References CO 9001KR1UH13 9001KR3UH13 9001KR2UH13 NO 9001KR1UH5 9001KR3UH5 9001KR2UH5 Mushroom head pushbuttons, latching (1) Emergency switching off Emergency stop Type of push Push-pull Turn-to-Release, trigger action Ø 41 mushroom head Ø 35 mushroom head Ø 40 red mushroom head Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class III Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31 mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp) 57,2 x 44,5 (without legend plate), 100 x 100 ((with legend plate 9001KN8330) (2) Depth below head (mm) 42 60 Connection Screw clamp terminals References – – – 9001KR16 CO 9001KR9R94H13 9001KR9R20H13 – NC 9001KR9RH6 9001KR9R20H6 – 2NO + 2NC – – 9001KR16H2 NO – – 9001KR16H13 (1) Mushroom head switching off mechanical latching pushbuttons conform to standard IEC 60364-5-53 and EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Mushroom head Emergency stop trigger action and mechanical latching pushbuttons conforming to standard EN/IEC 60204‑1 and EN/ISO 13850, to Machinery directive 2006/42/EC and standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Selector switches and key switches Type of operator Long black handle Key, n° 455 positions (2) 3 - spring return 2 - stay put 2 - spring return 3 - stay put 2 - stay put Number and type of positions Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31 mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp) Depth below head (mm) 42 Connection Screw clamp terminals References NO – 9001KS11FBH5 9001KS34FBH5 – – CO 9001KS53FBH1 – – 9001KS43FBH1 9001KS11K1RH1 (2) The symbol indicates key withdrawal position. Harmony 9001K/SK Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 30 with metal bezel Contact functions 18 (2) For yellow circular Emergency Stop legend plates: see page 9 Pilot lights Type of head Smooth lens cap Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31 mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp) Depth below head (mm) 42 Connection Screw clamp terminals Type of light block With high luminosity LED (included) Incandescent BA 9s bulb (included) 24 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V AC References green 9001KP35LGG9 9001KP36LGG9 9001KP38LGG9 9001KP7G9 red 9001KP35LRR9 9001KP36LRR9 9001KP38LRR9 9001KP7R9 yellow 9001KP35LYA9 9001KP36LYA9 9001KP38LYA9 9001KP7A9 Illuminated pushbuttons, spring return Type of head Spring return flush push Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31 mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp) Depth below head (mm) 42 Connection Screw clamp terminals Type of light block With high luminosity LED (included) Incandescent BA 9s bulb (included) 24 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V AC References green CO 9001K3L35LGGH13 9001K3L36LGGH13 9001K3L38LGGH13 9001K2L7RH13 red CO 9001K3L35LRRH13 9001K3L36LRRH13 9001K3L38LRRH13 9001K2L7GH13 yellow CO 9001K3L35LYAH13 9001K3L36LYAH13 9001K3L38LYAH13 9001K2L7AH13 Illuminated Ø 41 mushroom head pushbuttons, latching, high luminosity LED Degree of protection IP 66 / Nema 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 6, 12 and 13 / Class II Mounting (mm) panel cut-out Ø 31 mounting centres 57.2 x 44.5 (with legend 9001KN2pp), 57.2 x 50.8 (with legend 9001KN3pp) Depth below head (mm) 42 Connection Screw clamp terminals Type of light block With high luminosity LED (included) Incandescent BA 9s bulb (included) 24 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC 120 V AC/DC 230 V AC/DC Type of head 2 position, push-pull References red CO 9001KR9P35RH13 9001KR9P36RH13 9001KR9P38RH13 9001KR9P7RH13 Type of head 3 position, push-pull (pull: spring return, centre: stay put, push: spring return) References red NC + NC late break 9001KR8P35RH25 9001KR8P36RH25 9001KR8P38RH25 9001KR8P7RH25 Light functions 19 Contact blocks with protected terminals Type of contact Single contact blocks Connection Screw clamp terminals References CO 9001KA1 NO 9001KA2 NC 9001KA3 CO, late break 9001KA4 NC, late break 9001KA5 NO, early make 9001KA6 Enclosures Type Number of Ø 30 mm cut-outs NEMA ratings Reference Aluminium 1 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY1 2 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY2 3 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY3 4 1, 3, 4, 6, 12, 13 9001KY4 Stainless steel 1 1, 3, 4, 4X, 13 9001KYSS1 2 1, 3, 4, 4X, 13 9001KYSS2 3 1, 3, 4, 4X, 13 9001KYSS3 Legends 44 x 43 mm 57 x 57 mm Ø 60 Ø 90 Type Aluminium Plastic Plastic Colour of legend black background white background Yellow background Marking Blank 9001KN200 9001KN100WP 9001KN9100 9001KN8100 START 9001KN201 9001KN101WP – – STOP (red background) 9001KN202 9001KN102RP – – FORWARD 9001KN206 9001KN106WP – – REVERSE 9001KN207 9001KN107WP – – RESET 9001KN223 9001KN123WP – PULL TO START/ 9001KN379 9001KN179WP – – PUSH TO STOP EMERGENCY STOP – – 9001KN9330 9001KN8330 ARRET D’URGENCE – – 9001KN9330F 9001KN8330F PARADA DE EMERGENCIA – – 9001KN9330S 9001KN8330S Harmony 9001K/SK Pushbuttons, switches and pilot lights Ø 30 with metal bezel Accessories 20 Cam switches 12 and 20 A ratings Harmony K series positions (°) Cam switches, K1 / K2 series Function Switches ON-OFF switches Stepping switches 45° switching angle 90° switching angle with “0” position Degree of protection front face IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1) Conventional thermal current (Ith) 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V Number of positions 2 2 2 + “0” position Number of poles 2 2 2 Dimensions of front plate (mm) 45 x 45 45 x 45 45 x 45 Front mounting method Multifixing plate, 45 x 45 mm K1B002ALH K2B 002ALH K1B1002HLH K2B 1002HLH K1D012QLH K2D012QLH Plastic mounting plate for Ø 22 mm hole K1B002ACH K2B 002ACH K1B1002HCH K2B 1002HCH K1D012QCH K2D012QCH positions (°) Cam switches, K1 / K2 series Function Changeover switches Ammeter switches Voltmeter switches Degree of protection front face IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1) IP 65 (1) Conventional thermal current (Ith) 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A 12 A 20 A Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V Number of positions 2 + “0” position 3 + “0” position 6 + “0” position (measurements (3 circuits + “0” position) between 3 phases & N + “0” pos.) Number of poles 2 4 7 Dimensions of front plate (mm) 45 x 45 45 x 45 45 x 45 Front mounting method Multifixing plate, 45 x 45 mm K1D002ULH K2D002ULH K1F003MLH to be compiled * K1F027MLH to be compiled * Plastic mounting plate for Ø 22 mm hole K1D002UCH K2D002UCH K1F003MCH to be compiled * K1F027MCH to be compiled * (1) With seal KZ73 for switch with Multifixing plate, with seal KZ65 for Ø 22 mm hole mounting switches. Seal to be ordered separately. (*) Please consult your Schneider Electric agency. positions (°) Cam switches with key operated lock, K1 series Function Stepping switches Run switches Changeover switches + “0” pos. Degree of protection front face IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 Conventional thermal current (Ith) 12 A 12 A 12 A Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V Number of positions 2 + “0” position 3 + “0” position 2 + “0” position Number of poles 3 2 2 Dimensions of front plate (mm) 55 x 100 55 x 100 55 x 100 Colour of handle red black red black red black Front mounting method Ø 22 mm hole + Ø 43.5 mm hole K1F022QZ2 K1F022QZ4 K1G043RZ2 K1G043RZ4 K1D002UZ2 K1D002UZ4 12 0 45 34 1-pole 2-pole 12 0 90 34 2-pole 90 1 0 45 2345678 135 180 225 2-pole 45 1 315 0 2345678 1-pole 2-pole 180 1 234 0 90 270 56789 10 11 12 0 1 234 270 315 5678 225 9 10 45 90 11 12 135 0 1 23456789 10 11 12 60 120 123456789 10 11 12 13 14 0 60 120 180 300 1 2345678 0 60 21 positions (°) Cam switches, K10 series Function Switches Changeover switches Ammeter Voltmeter 60° switching angle with “0” position switches switches Degree of protection front face IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 IP 65 Conventional thermal current (Ith) 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 440 V 440 V 440 V 440 V Number of positions 2 2 + “0” position 3 + “0” pos. (1) 6 + “0” pos. (2) Number of poles 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 Dimensions of front plate (mm) 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30 30 x 30 Front mounting method By Ø 16 mm or 22 mm hole K10A001ACH K10B002ACH K10C003ACH K10D002UCH K10F003UCH K10F003MCH K10F027MCH (1) (3 circuits + “0” position). (2) (Measurements between 3 phases and N + “0” position). positions (°) Cam switches, K30 series Function Switches Switches Changeover Starting Starting Reversing ON-OFF with “0” position star-delta 2-speed Degree of protection front face IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 IP 40 Conventional thermal current (Ith) 32 A 32 A 32 A 32 A 32 A 32 A Rated insulation voltage (Ui) conforming to IEC60947-1 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V 690 V Number of positions 2 2 3 3 3 3 Number of poles 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 Dimensions of front plate (mm) 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 64 x 64 Front mounting method Multifixing K30C003AP(3) K30C003HP(3) K30D004HP(3) K30H004UP(3) K30H001YP(3) K30H004PP(3) K30E003WP(3) (3) To order switches with other thermal current ratings (50, 63, 115, 150 A): replace the number 30 in the reference by 50, 63, 115 or 150 respectively. Example: a switch with a 32 A current rating, for example K30C003AP, becomes K50 C003AP for a current rating of 50 A. Accessories for cam switches K1/K2 Rubber seals for IP 65 degree of protection For use with heads with 45 x 45 mm front plate with 60 x 60 mm front plate with 45 x 45 mm front plate Ø 22 mm hole or 4 hole front mtg. Ø 22 mm hole or 4 hole front mtg. multifixing References* KZ65 KZ66 KZ73 * Sold in lots of 5. Cam switches 10 to 150 A ratings Harmony K series 0 1 23456 60 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 0 1 2 60 34 300 56789 10 11 12 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 90 1 2 180 34 0 270 56789 10 11 12 300 1 2 330 34 270 0 30 60 90 56789 10 11 12 0 1 23456 60 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 0 1 2345678 90 1-pole 2-pole 0 12 60 34 1234 300 56789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 0 12 60 34 1234 300 56789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 1260 34 1234 300 56789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 12 60 34 1234 300 56789 10 11 12 22 Monolithic tower lights Ø 40, Ø 60, Ø 100 mm, complete, pre-wired tower lights Harmony XVC Ø 40 mm / Up to IP54 Complete, pre-wired tower lights Steady light Steady / Flashing light (1) Light source (included) LEDs LEDs Base mount Base mounting Support tube mounting, 17 mm Support tube mounting, 17 mm Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer + flashing light Degree of protection up to IP54 up to IP54 Voltage 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 100-240V AC 24V AC/DC 100 - 240V AC References (2) Red XVC4B1K XVC4B1 XVC4M1 (4) XVC4B15S XVC4M15S (4) Red / orange XVC4B2K XVC4B2 XVC4M2 XVC4B25S XVC4M25S Red / Orange / green XVC4B3K XVC4B3 XVC4M3 XVC4B35S XVC4M35S red / orange / green / blue XVC4B4K XVC4B4 XVC4M4 XVC4B45S XVC4M45S red / orange / green / blue / Clear XVC4B5K XVC4B5 XVC4M5 XVC4B55S XVC4M55S Ø 60 mm / Up to IP54 Complete, pre-wired tower lights Steady light Steady / Flashing light (1) Light source (included) LEDs LEDs Base mount Base mounting Support tube mounting, 22 mm Support tube mounting, 22 mm Base mounting Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer + flashing light Degree of protection up to IP54 up to IP54 Voltage 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 100-240 V AC (4) 24V AC/DC 100-240 V AC (4) References (2) Red XVC6B1K XVC6B1 XVC6M1 (3) XVC6B15S (3) XVC6M15S XVC6M15SK Red / orange XVC6B2K XVC6B2 XVC6M2 (3) XVC6B25S (3) XVC6M25S XVC6M25SK Red / Orange / green XVC6B3K XVC6B3 XVC6M3 (3) XVC6B35S (3) XVC6M35S XVC6M35SK red / orange / green / blue XVC6B4K XVC6B4 XVC6M4 (3) XVC6B45S (3) XVC6M45S XVC6M45SK red / orange / green / blue / Clear XVC6B5K XVC6B5 XVC6M5 (3) XVC6B55S (3) XVC6M55S XVC6M55SK Ø 100 mm / Up to IP54 Complete, pre-wired tower lights Steady / Flashing light (1) Light source (included) LEDs Base mount Base mounting Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer + flashing light Degree of protection up to IP54 up to IP54 Voltage 24V DC (4) 100-240V AC (4) 24VDC (4) 100-240V AC (4) 24VDC (4) 100-240V AC (4) References (2) Red XVC1B1K XVC1M1K XVC1B1SK XVC1M1SK XVC1B1HK XVC1M1HK Red / orange XVC1B2K XVC1M2K XVC1B2SK XVC1M2SK XVC1B2HK XVC1M2HK Red / Orange / green XVC1B3K XVC1M3K XVC1B3SK XVC1M3SK XVC1B3HK XVC1M3HK red / orange / green / blue XVC1B4K XVC1M4K XVC1B4SK XVC1M4SK - - red / orange / green / blue / Clear XVC1B5K XVC1M5K XVC1B5SK XVC1M5SK - - (1) Flashing function can be simply selected/programmed by wiring (2) The colours are listed in the same order as the mounting order of the illuminated units (from top to bottom) (3) To order products for base mounting, add the letter K to the end of the reference (ex. XVC6M1K) (4) NPN only 23 Monolithic tower lights and accessories Ø 45 mm, complete illuminated beacons Harmony XVDLS / XVC Ø 45 mm / IP40 Illuminated beacons XVDLS Steady light Flashing light Light source Incandescent BA 15d bulb, 5 W max. (not included) “Flash” discharge tube, 0.5 J Degree of protection IP 40 References (1) 24…230 V AC/DC XVDLS3p – 24 V AC/DC – XVDLS6Bp 120 V AC – XVDLS6Gp 230 V AC – XVDLS6Mp (1) To obtain the complete reference, replace the p by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow. Accessories XVDLS Incandescent bulbs, with BA 15d base Beacons XVDLS Description 24 V, 4 W 120 V, 5 W 230 V, 5 W References DL1BEBS DL1BEGS DL1BEMS XVC4 / XVC6 Mounting accessories Tower lights Ø 40 mm, XVC4 Tower lights Ø 60 mm, XVC6 Description Support tube mounting Support tube mounting Base mounting Support tube mounting Diameter (mm) Ø 90 Ø 84 – Ø 100 Ø 84 – For use with – – – XVC6ppand XVC6pp5S XVC6ppK and XVC6pp5SK XVC6Bpand XVC6Bpp5S, XVC6Mpand XVC6Mp5S Height to be added (mm) 32 24,5 82 30 21,6 82 References Metal fixing plate XVCZ11 – – XVCZ02 XVCZ12 – Plastic fixing plate – XVCZ01 – – – – Wall mounting bracket – – XVCZ31 – – XVCZ32 XVC1 Mounting accessories Tower lights Ø 100 mm, XVC1 Description Vertical support Diameter (mm) Ø 140 Ø 140 – – For use with XVC1ppK and XVC1ppSK XVC1ppHK (with siren) XVC1ppK and XVC1ppSK XVC1ppHK (with siren) Height to be added (mm) 300 306 – – References Metal fixing plate (2) XVCZ13 XVCZ14 – – Metal fixing bracket – – XVCZ23 XVCZ24 (2) Chromium plated-steel extension tube 24 Modular tower lights Ø 70 mm, for customer assembly Harmony XVB Ø 70 mm / Up to IP66 Illuminated beacons XVBL Steady light Flashing light Light source Incandescent BA 15d bulb, Protected BA 15d LED Protected BA 15d LED “Flash” discharge tube 10 W max. (not included) (included) (included) 5 J (2) Degree of protection IP 66 References (1) 12…250 V AC/DC XVBL3p – – – 24 V AC/DC – XVBL0Bp XVBL1Bp XVBL6Bp 120 V AC – XVBL0Gp XVBL1Gp XVBL6Gp 230 V AC – XVBL0Mp XVBL1Mp XVBL6Mp Ø 70 mm / Up to IP66 Tower lights XVBC comprising 2 to 5 signalling units (3) Base units Steady light Flashing light “Flash” light Audible units (90 db at 1 m) Light source – Incandescent Integral Integral “Flash” – BA 15d bulb, 10 W protected LED protected LED discharge tube max. (not included) 5 J (2) Degree of protection IP 66 Base unit references with cover XVBC21 (4) – – – – – without cover XVBC07 (5) – – – – – References (2) 12… 230 V AC/DC – XVBC3p – – – – 24 V AC/DC – – XVBC2Bp XVBC5Bp XVBC6Bp – 120 V AC – – XVBC2Gp XVBC5Gp XVBC6Gp – 230 V AC – – XVBC2Mp XVBC5Mp XVBC6Mp – Audible unit references 12…48 V AC/DC – – – – – XVBC9B unidirectional 120…230 V AC – – – – – XVBC9M (1) To obtain the complete reference, replace thep by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow. (2) To order a lens unit with a 10 J discharge tube, replace the number 6 by 8 in the reference (example: XVBL6Bp becomes XVBL8Bp). (3) A tower light comprises: 1 base unit + 1 to 5 signalling units maximum. (4) For connection on AS-Interface, order base unit XVBC21A (side cable entry) or XVBC21B (bottom cable entry with M12 connector on flying lead). (5) For indicator banks with “flash” discharge tube unit. 25 Modular tower lights Ø 70 mm, for customer assembly Harmony XVE Ø 70 mm / Up to IP54 Illuminated beacons XVEL Steady light Flashing light Light source Incandescent Integral “Flash” discharge tube, 1 J BA 15d bulb, 5 W max. LED (not included) Degree of protection IP 42/IP 54 (with sealing kit) References (1) 24… 240 V AC/DC XVEL3p – 24 V AC/DC – XVEL2Bp XVEL6Bp 120 V AC – XVEL2Gp XVEL6Gp 230 V AC – XVEL2Mp XVEL6Mp Ø 70 mm / Up to IP54 Indicator banks XVEC comprising 2 to 5 signalling units (2) Base units Steady light Flashing light “Flash” light Audible units (85 db at 1 m) Light source – Incandescent Integral Integral “Flash” – BA 15d bulb, 5 W LED LED discharge tube max. (not included) 1 J Degree of protection IP 42/IP 54 (with sealing kit) Base unit references IP 42 XVEC21 – – – – – IP 54 XVEC21P – – – – – Lens unit references (1) 24…230 V AC/DC – XVEC3p – 24 V AC/DC – – XVEC2Bp XVEC5Bp XVEC6Bp XVEC9B 120 V AC – – XVEC2Gp XVEC5Gp XVEC6Gp XVEC9G 230 V AC – – XVEC2Mp XVEC5Mp XVEC6Mp XVEC9M (1) To obtain the complete reference, replace thep by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow. (2) A tower light comprises: 1 base unit + 1 to 5 signalling units maximum. 26 Modular tower lights Ø 45, Ø 50 mm, complete or for customer assembly Harmony XVM / XVP Ø 45 mm / IP42 Complete, pre-wired tower light XVM (1) 2 sig. units + integral buzzer (2) Steady light 3 signalling units + integral buzzer (2) Steady light Steady light + “flash” (3) Light source (included) Incandescent BA 15d Incandescent BA 15d Incandescent BA 15d BA 15d bulb, 5 W “Super bright” LED BA 15d bulb, 5 W “Super bright” LED BA 15d bulb, 5 W “Super bright” max. max. max. LED Degree of protection IP 54 Signalling colours Red - Green Red - Orange - Green References 24 V AC/DC XVMB1RGS XVMB2RGSSB XVMB1RAGS XVMB2RAGSSB XVMB1R6AGS XVMB2R6AGSSB 120 V AC/DC (bulb) - 120 V AC (LED) XVMG1RGS XVMG2RGSSB XVMG1RAGS XVMG2RAGSSB XVMG1R6AGS XVMG2R6AGSSB 230 V AC/DC (bulb) - 230 V AC (LED) XVMM1RGS XVMM2RGSSB XVMM1RAGS XVMM2RAGSSB XVMM1RA6GS XVMM2R6AGSSB (1) Tower lights XVM are also available as separate components for customised assembly by the user: please refer to www.schneider-electric.com. (2) To order products without an integral buzzer, delete the letter S at the end of the reference (example: XVMB2RGS becomes XVMB2RG, XVMB2RGSSB becomes XVMB2RGSB). (3) Flash signalling colour: red - 0.8 J. Ø 50 mm / IP65 Tower lights XVP comprising 2 to 5 signalling units (4), black clamping ring (5) Base unit Steady or flashing light signalling “Flash” light signalling Audible units (55…85 dB at 1 m) Light source – Incandescent “Flash” “Flash” – BA 15d bulb, 7 W discharge tube discharge tube max. (not included) 0.3 J 0.6 J Degree of protection IP 65 Base unit with cover XVPC21 – – – – References (6) 250 V max. – XVPC3p – – – 24 V AC/DC (flash) - 24 V DC (buzzer) – – XVPC6Bp – XVPC09B 120 V AC – – – XVPC6Gp XVPC09G 230 V AC – – – XVPC6Mp XVPC09M (4) A tower light comprises: 1 base unit + 1 to 5 signalling units maximum. (5) To order products with a cream clamping ring, add the letter W to the end of the reference (example: base unit + green lens unit: XVPC21W + XVPC33W etc.). (6) To obtain the complete reference, replace thep by the number designating the colour as follow: 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 7 = clear, 8 = yellow. 27 Bulbs Beacons and tower lights XVB / XVP (1) Type of light source Incandescent Incandescent LED (2) Flashing BA 15d base BA 15d base BA 15d base LED (2) 7 W 10 W (not XVP) BA 15d base References 12 V DL1BEJ DL1BLJ – – 24 V DL1BEB DL1BLB DL1BDBp DL1BKBp 48 V DL1BEE DL1BLE – – 120 V DL1BEG DL1BLG DL1BDGp DL1BKGp 230 V DL1BEM DL1BLM DL1BDMp DL1BKMp (1) Tower lights XVP can be fitted with 5 W incandescent bulbs: see beacons XVDLS / XVE. (2) To obtain the complete reference, replace the p by the number designating the colour as follow: 1 = white, 3 = green , 4 = red , 5 = orange, 6 = blue, 8 = yellow. Bulbs Tower lights XVM Type of light source Incandescent LED (3) Flashing “Flash” discharge BA 15d base BA 15d base LED (3) tube, 0.8 Joule 5 W BA 15d base BA 15d base References 24 V DL1EDBS DL2EDBpSB DL1EKBpSB DL6BB 120 V DL1EDGS DL2EDGpSB DL1EKGpSB DL6BG 230 V DL1EDMS DL2EDMpSB DL1EKMpSB DL6BM (3) To obtain the complete reference, replace the p by the number designating the colour as follows: 1 = white, 3 = green , 4 = red , 6 = blue, 8 = orange. Mounting accessories Beacons and tower lights XVB / XVE Tower lights Tower lights XVP XVM Description Aluminium tube Plastic tube Aluminium tube Aluminium tube Aluminium tube Aluminium tube with integral black with integral black with integral black with steel fixing with integral cream with steel fixing plastic fixing base plastic fixing base plastic fixing base bracket plastic fixing base bracket Diameter (mm) Ø 25 Ø 25 Ø 20 Ø 20 Ø 20 Ø 20 Support tubes 60 mm XVEZ13 – – – – – 100 mm – – – XVPC02T XVMZ02 XVMZ02T 112 mm – – XVPC02 (4) – – – 120 mm XVBZ02 – – – – – 140 mm – XVDC02 – – – – 250 mm – – – XVPC03T XVMZ03 XVMZ03T 260 mm – – XVPC03 (4) – – – 400 mm – – – XVPC04T XVMZ04 XVMZ04T 410 mm – – XVPC04 (4) – – – 420 mm XVBZ03 – – – – – 820 mm XVBZ04 – – – – – Fixing plates, for vertical support XVBC12 XVPC12 (4) – for horizontal support XVBZ01 – XVMZ06 (4) To order an aluminium support tube with integral cream fixing base, add the letter W to the end of the reference (example: XVPC02W). Modular tower lights accessories For XVB, XVP, XVE, XVM Harmony XV 28 Rotating beacons Ø 84, 106, 120, 130 mm rotating beacons Harmony XVR Ø 84 / 106 mm Complete, pre-wired rotating beacons Ø 84 mm Ø 106 mm Light source (included) “ Super bright “ LEDs Base mount 3 x Ø 05 Buzzer Without buzzer Degree of protection IP23 (IP 65 with accessories) IP23 (IP 55 with accessories) Voltage 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC References Red XVR08J04 XVR08B04 XVR10J04 XVR10B04 Orange XVR08J05 XVR08B05 XVR10J05 XVR10B05 Green XVR08J03 XVR08B03 XVR10J03 XVR10B03 Blue XVR08J06 XVR08B06 XVR10J06 XVR10B06 Ø 120 mm Complete, pre-wired rotating beacons Ø 120 mm Light source (included) “ Super bright “ LEDs Base mount 3 x M5 Buzzer Without buzzer With buzzer Degree of protection IP23 Voltage 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC References Red XVR12J04 XVR12B04 XVR12J04S XVR12B04S Orange XVR12J05 XVR12B05 XVR12J05S XVR12B05S Green XVR12J03 XVR12B03 XVR12J03S XVR12B03S Blue XVR12J06 XVR12B06 XVR12J06S XVR12B06S Ø 130 mm Complete, pre-wired rotating beacons Ø 130 mm Light source (included) “ Super bright “ LEDs Base mount 3 x Ø 09 Buzzer Without buzzer Degree of protection IP66 - Resistant to vibration IP66 and IP67 Voltage 12V DC 24V DC 24V AC/DC 120V AC 230V AC References Red XVR13J04 XVR13B04 XVR13B04L XVR13G04L XVR13M04L Orange XVR13J05 XVR13B05 XVR13B05L XVR13G05L XVR13M05L 29 Accesories for rotating mirrors Reflecting prism Rubber base Metal angle bracket Metal fixing plate To be used for/with – Increasing the IP degree Horizontal support Horizontal support Height (mm) – – – 300 References Ø 84 mm XVRZR1 XVRZ081 XVCZ23 – Ø 106 mm XVRZR2 XVRZ082 XVCZ23 XVCZ13 Ø 120 mm XVRZR3 – XVCZ23 XVCZ13 Ø 130 mm XVRZR3 – XVR012L – Electronic alarms and multisound sirens Sirens and electronic alarms Sirens Multisound sirens pre-wired Electronic alarms Panel Mount DIN72 Electronic alarms Panel Mount DIN96 Sound level 106 dB 105 dB 90 dB 96 dB Tones 2 43 16 16 Channels – 8 4 4 Degree of protection IP 53 IP53 IP 54 IP 54 Colors White White Black White Black White References 12/24V AC/DC XVS10BMW – XVS72BMBp (1) XVS72BMWp (1) XVS96BMBp (1) XVS96BMWp (1) 12/24V DC – XVS14BMW – – – – 120V AC XVS10GMW XVS14GMW – – – – 230V AC XVS10MMW XVS14MMW – – – – (1) To obtain a complete reference, replace the p by the letter as follow: P = PNP, N = NPN (ex. XVS72BMBP) Rotating beacons accessories and sound solutions Accessories for rotating beacons Harmony XVR / XVS 30 Type XACA “Pistol grip” Degree of protection IP 65 / Nema 4, 4X / Class II Rated operational characteristics AC 15 (240 V 3 A), DC 13 Conventional thermal current Ithe 10 A Connection Screw clamp terminals, 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2 For control of single-speed motors 2-speed motors Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 52 x 295 x 71 (x 85 with ZA2BS834) 52 x 295 x 71 (x 85 with ZA2BS834) Number of operators mechanically interlocked 2 2 Emergency stop without ZA2BS834 without ZA2BS834 References XACA201 XACA2014 XACA207 XACA2074 Type XACA For control of single-speed motors Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 80 x 314 x 70 (x 90 with ZA2BS834) 80 x 440 x 70 (x 90 with ZA2BS844) Number of operators mechanically interlocked between pairs 2 4 Emergency stop without ZA2BS834 without ZA2BS844 References XACA271 XACA2714 XACA471 XACA4714 For control of single-speed motors + I / O Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 80 x 500 x 70 (x 90 with ZA2BS844) 80 x 560 x 70 Number of operators mechanically interlocked between pairs 6 8 Emergency stop without ZA2BS844 without References XACA671 XACA6714 XACA871 Empty enclosures type XACA Number of ways 2 3 4 5 6 8 12 References XACA02 XACA03 XACA04 XACA05 XACA06 XACA08 XACA12 Pendant control stations for control circuits Ready to use Harmony XAC 31 (1) Trigger action mechanically latching Emergency stop pushbuttons conform to standards EN/IEC 60204-32, EN/ISO 13850, Machinery directive 2006/42/EC and standard EN/IEC 60947-5-5. Legends, 30 x 40 mm With symbols conforming to NF E 52-124 With text References ZB2BY4901 ZB2BY4903 ZB2BY4907 ZB2BY4909 ZB2BY4913 ZB2BY4915 ZB2BY4930 ZB2BY2303 ZB2BY2304 References ZB2BY2904 ZB2BY2906 ZB2BY2910 ZB2BY2912 ZB2BY2916 ZB2BY2918 ZB2BY2931 ZB2BY1W140 blank white or yellow background Separate components (for mounting in enclosures XACA) Booted operators white XACA9411 black XACA9412 Mushroom head, latching, trigger action (1) turn to release Ø 40 ZA2BS844 Ø 30 ZA2BS834 Mushroom head, latching, trigger action (1) key release Ø 40 ZA2BS944 Ø 30 ZA2BS934 Selector switch 2 pos. stay put ZA2BD2 3 pos. stay put ZA2BD3 Key switch key n° 455 2 pos. stay put ZA2BG4 3 pos. stay put ZA2BG5 Blanking plug with seal and ZB2SZ3 fixing nut Pilot light heads white ZA2BV01 green ZA2BV03 red ZA2BV04 yellow ZA2BV05 Pilot light bodies direct supply ZB2BV006 direct supply, through resistor ZB2BV007 Protective guard (for base mounted units) For selector switch XACA982/983 For emergency stop pushbutton XACA984 Contact blocks Single-speed NO ZB2BE101 Single-speed NC ZB2BE102 Contacts blocks for XACA941p Single-speed NC+NO XENG1491 2-speed NC+NO+NO XENG1191 Contact blocks (for mounting in enclosure base) NO XACS101 NC+NO XACS105 Isolating switch, slow break, for front mounting Emergency stop NC+NC+NC with positive opening operation XENT1192 Double blocks latching, slow break Single-speed NO+NO XENG3781 Single-speed NO+NC XENG3791 32 Notes 33 ART. 097419 01/2013 - V10.0 DIA4ED2040408EN Head Office 35, rue Joseph Monier - CS 30323 F92500 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex France www.schneider-electric.com The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein. Design : IGS-CP Photos : Schneider Electric Print : http://www.farnell.com/datasheets/1761538.pdf This document was generated on 01/06/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION Part Number: 39-01-2020 Status: Active Overview: Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors Description: Mini-Fit Jr.™ Receptacle Housing, Dual Row, UL 94V-2, 2 Circuits Documents: 3D Model Product Specification PS-5556-001 (PDF) Drawing (PDF) Test Summary TS-5556-002 (PDF) Product Specification PS-45750-001 (PDF) RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF) Agency Certification CSA LR19980 UL E29179 General Product Family Crimp Housings Series 5557 Application Power, Wire-to-Wire Comments Current = 13A max. per circuit when header is mated to a receptacle loaded with 45750 series terminals crimped to 16 AWG wire. . See Molex product specification PS-45750-001 for additional current derating information.. Glow Wire Equivalent Part. MolexKits Yes Overview Mini-Fit Jr.™ Power Connectors Product Name Mini-Fit Jr.™ UPC 800753584259 Physical Breakaway No Circuits (maximum) 2 Color - Resin Natural Flammability 94V-2 Gender Female Glow-Wire Compliant No Material - Resin Nylon Net Weight 0.657/g Number of Rows 2 Packaging Type Bag Panel Mount No Pitch - Mating Interface 4.20mm Pitch - Termination Interface 4.20mm Polarized to Mating Part Yes Stackable No Temperature Range - Operating -40°C to +105°C Electrical Current - Maximum per Contact 13A Material Info Old Part Number 5557-02R Reference - Drawing Numbers Product Specification PS-45750-001, PS-5556-001, RPS-5557-046 Sales Drawing SD-5557-003 Test Summary TS-5556-002 Series image - Reference only EU RoHS China RoHS ELV and RoHS Compliant REACH SVHC Contains SVHC: No Low-Halogen Status Low-Halogen Need more information on product environmental compliance? Email productcompliance@molex.com For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of Compliance, click here Please visit the Contact Us section for any non-product compliance questions. Search Parts in this Series 5557Series Mates With 5559 Dual Row, 5566 Vertical with Pegs, 5566 Vertical without Pegs, 5569 Right Angle Dual Row with Flanges, 5569 Right Angle Dual Row with Pegs, 43810 , 44068 , 44281 , 87427 , 42404 , 42440 Use With 5556 Mini-Fit® Female Crimp Terminals, 45750 Mini-Fit® Plus HCS Crimp TerminalThis document was generated on 01/06/2014 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION This document was generated on 10/10/2013 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION Part Number: 87439-0400 Status: Active Overview: Pico-Spox™ Wire-to-Board Connector System Description: 1.50mm Pitch Pico-SPOX™ Wire-to-Board Housing, 4 Circuits, Off-White Housing Documents: 3D Model RoHS Certificate of Compliance (PDF) Drawing (PDF) Product Literature (PDF) Product Specification PS-87437 (PDF) Agency Certification CSA LR19980 UL E29179 General Product Family Crimp Housings Series 87439 Application Signal, Wire-to-Board MolexKits Yes Overview Pico-Spox™ Wire-to-Board Connector System Product Literature Order No USA-235 Product Name Pico-SPOX™ UPC 800753537224 Physical Circuits (maximum) 4 Color - Resin Natural Flammability 94V-0 Gender Female Glow-Wire Compliant No Lock to Mating Part Yes Material - Resin Nylon Net Weight 55.000/mg Number of Rows 1 Packaging Type Bag Panel Mount No Pitch - Mating Interface 1.50mm Polarized to Mating Part Yes Stackable No Temperature Range - Operating -55°C to +105°C Electrical Current - Maximum per Contact 2.5A Material Info Reference - Drawing Numbers Product Specification PS-87437, RPS-87437, RPS-87437-001, RPS-87437-200, RPS-87438-002 Sales Drawing SD-87439-**00 Series image - Reference only EU RoHS China RoHS ELV and RoHS Compliant REACH SVHC Contains SVHC: No Low-Halogen Status Low-Halogen Need more information on product environmental compliance? Email productcompliance@molex.com For a multiple part number RoHS Certificate of Compliance, click here Please visit the Contact Us section for any non-product compliance questions. Search Parts in this Series 87439Series Mates With Pico-SPOX™ Wire-to-Board Header 87437 , 87438 Use With 87421 Pico-SPOX™ Crimp Terminal This document was generated on 10/10/2013 PLEASE CHECK WWW.MOLEX.COM FOR LATEST PART INFORMATION PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 Product data sheet CAUTION This device is sensitive to ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD). Therefore care should be taken during transport and handling. Table 1. Quick reference data Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Per FET VDS drain-source voltage - - 25 V VGSoff gate-source cut-off voltage VDS = 10 V; ID = 1 A 2 - 6.5 V IDSS drain current VGS = 0 V; VDS = 10 V 24 - 60 mA Ptot total power dissipation Ts  90 C - - 190 mW yfs forward transfer admittance VDS = 10 V; ID = 10mA 10 - - mS PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 2 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor 2. Pinning information 3. Ordering information 4. Marking [1] * = p: made in Hong Kong. * = t: made in Malaysia. * = W: made in China. Table 2. Discrete pinning information Pin Description Simplified outline Symbol 1 source (1) 2 source (2) 3 gate (2) 4 drain (2) 5 drain (1) 6 gate (1) 1 2 3 6 5 4 sym034 6 3 2 4 1 5 Table 3. Ordering information Type number Package Name Description Version PMBFJ620 - plastic surface mounted package; 6 leads SOT363 Table 4. Marking Type number Marking code[1] PMBFJ620 A8* PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 3 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor 5. Limiting values 6. Thermal characteristics [1] Ts is the temperature at the soldering point of the gate pins, see Figure 1. Table 5. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit Per FET VDS drain-source voltage - 25 V VGSO gate-source voltage open drain - 25 V VGDO drain-gate voltage open source - 25 V IG forward gate current (DC) - 50 mA Ptot total power dissipation Ts  90 C - 190 mW Tstg storage temperature 65 +150 C Tj junction temperature - 150 C Table 6. Thermal characteristics Symbol Parameter Conditions Typ Unit Rth(j-s) thermal resistance from junction to soldering points single loaded [1] 315 K/W double loaded [1] 160 K/W (1) Double loaded. (2) Single loaded. Fig 1. Power derating curve. Ts (°C) 0 50 100 150 200 001aaa742 200 100 300 400 Ptot (mW) 0 (1) (2) PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 4 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor 7. Static characteristics 8. Dynamic characteristics Table 7. Characteristics Tj = 25 C unless otherwise specified. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Per FET V(BR)GSS gate-source breakdown voltage IG = 1 A; VDS = 0 V 25 - - V VGSoff gate-source cut-off voltage ID = 1 A; VDS = 10 V 2 - 6.5 V VGSS gate-source forward voltage IG = 1 mA; VDS = 0 V - - 1 V IDSS drain-source leakage current VDS = 10 V; VGS = 0 V 24 - 60 mA IGSS gate-source leakage current VGS = 15 V; VDS = 0 V - - 1 nA RDSon drain-source on-state resistance VGS = 0 V; VDS = 100mV - 50 -  yfs common source forward transfer admittance ID = 10 mA; VDS = 10 V 10 - - mS yos common source output admittance ID = 10 mA; VDS = 10 V - - 250 S Table 8. Characteristics Tj = 25 C unless otherwise specified. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Per FET Ciss input capacitance VDS = 10 V; VGS = 10 V; f =1 MHz - 3 5 pF VDS = 10 V; VGS = 0 V; Tamb = 25 C - 6 - pF Crss reverse transfer capacitance VDS = 0 V; VGS = 10 V; f = 1 MHz - 1.3 2.5 pF gis common source input conductance VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 200 - S VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 3 - mS gfs common source transfer conductance VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 13 - mS VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 12 - mS grs common source reverse conductance VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 30 - S VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 450 - S gos common source output conductance VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz - 150 - S VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 450 MHz - 400 - S Vn equivalent input noise voltage VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; f = 100 Hz - 6 - nV/Hz PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 5 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tj = 25 C. Fig 2. Drain current as a function of gate-source cut-off voltage; typical values. Fig 3. Common source forward transfer admittance as a function of gate-source cut-off voltage; typical values. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tj = 25 C. VDS = 100 mV; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 25 C. Fig 4. Common-source output conductance as a function of gate-source cut-off voltage; typical values. Fig 5. Drain-source on-state resistance as a function of gate-source cut-off voltage; typical values. VGSoff (V) 0 −1 −2 −3 −4 mcd220 20 30 10 40 50 IDSS (mA) 0 0 −2 −4 −8 mcd219 −6 20 0 16 12 8 yfs (mS) 4 VGSoff (V) 0 150 100 50 0 −1 −2 −4 mcd221 −3 gos (μS) VGSoff (V) 0 −1 −2 −4 80 60 20 0 40 mcd222 −3 RDSon (Ω) VGSoff (V) PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 6 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor Tj = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. Fig 6. Typical output characteristics. Fig 7. Typical transfer characteristics. VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. Fig 8. Reverse transfer capacitance as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values. Fig 9. Input capacitance as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values. VDS (V) 0 4 8 12 16 mcd217 20 10 30 40 ID (mA) 0 (2) (4) (1) (5) (6) (3) −4 −3 −2 0 40 30 10 0 20 mcd214 −1 ID (mA) VGS (V) −10 −4 0 4 3 1 0 2 mcd224 −8 −6 −2 Crs (pF) VGS (V) −10 0 10 0 mcd223 −8 −6 −4 −2 8 6 4 2 Cis (pF) VGS (V) PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 7 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor VDS = 10 V; Tj = 25 C. Fig 10. Drain current as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values. Tj = 25 C. Fig 11. Gate current as a function of drain-gate voltage; typical values. mcd229 1 10−2 10−1 102 10 103 ID (μA) 10−3 VGS (V) −2.5 −2.0 −1.5 −1.0 −0.5 0 mcd230 −10 −1 −103 −102 −104 IGSS (pA) −10−1 VDG (V) 0 4 8 12 16 (1) (2) (3) (4) PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 8 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor Fig 12. Gate current as a function of junction temperature; typical values. mcd231 10 1 103 102 104 IGSS (pA) 10−1 Tj (°C) −25 25 75 125 175 PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 9 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C. Fig 13. Input admittance as a function of frequency; typical values. Fig 14. Forward transfer admittance as a function of frequency; typical values. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C. VDS = 10 V; ID = 10 mA; Tamb = 25 C. Fig 15. Reverse transfer admittance as a function of frequency; typical values. Fig 16. Output admittance as a function of frequency; typical values. mcd228 10 1 gis, bis (mS) 10−1 102 f (MHz) 10 102 103 bis gis f (MHz) 10 102 103 mcd227 10 102 gfs,−bfs (mS) 1 gfs −bfs mcd226 f (MHz) 10 102 103 −10−1 −1 −10 −102 brs, grs (mS) −10−2 brs grs mcd225 10 1 bos, gos (mS) 10−1 102 f (MHz) 10 102 103 bos gos PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 10 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor 9. Package outline Fig 17. Package outline. OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA SOT363 SC-88 bp w M B D e1 e pin 1 index A A1 Lp Q detail X HE E v M A B A y 0 1 2 mm scale c X 1 2 3 6 5 4 Plastic surface-mounted package; 6 leads SOT363 UNIT A1 max bp c D E e1 HE Lp Q v w y mm 0.1 0.30 0.20 2.2 1.8 0.25 0.10 1.35 1.15 0.65 e 1.3 2.2 2.0 0.2 0.2 0.1 DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) 0.45 0.15 0.25 0.15 A 1.1 0.8 04-11-08 06-03-16 PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 11 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor 10. Revision history Table 9. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes PMBFJ620 v.2 20110915 Product data sheet - PMBFJ620 v.1 Modifications: • The format of this data sheet has been redesigned to comply with the new identity guidelines of NXP Semiconductors. • Legal texts have been adapted to the new company name where appropriate. • Package outline drawings have been updated to the latest version. PMBFJ620 v.1 (9397 750 13006) 20040511 Product data sheet - - PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 12 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor 11. Legal information 11.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”. [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 11.2 Definitions Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however, shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the Product data sheet. 11.3 Disclaimers Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory. Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their applications and products. NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device. Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. PMBFJ620 All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 2 — 15 September 2011 13 of 14 NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding. Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified, the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications. In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer (a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b) whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications. 11.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 12. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com NXP Semiconductors PMBFJ620 Dual N-channel field-effect transistor © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 15 September 2011 Document identifier: PMBFJ620 Advanced Materials Araldite® 2014-1 Structural Adhesives TECHNICAL DATA SHEET Araldite® 2014-1 Two component epoxy paste adhesive Key properties Grey paste High temperature and chemical resistance Low shrinkage Very resistant to water and a variety of chemicals Gap filling, non sagging up to 5mm thickness Description Araldite 2014-1 is a two component, room temperature curing, thixotropic paste adhesive of high strength with good environmental and excellent chemical resistance. Used for bonding of metals, electronic components, GRP structures and many other items where a higher than normal temperature or more aggressive environment is to be encountered in service. The low out gassing makes this product suitable for specialist electronic telecommunication and aerospace applications. Product data Property 2014-1/A 2014-1/B 2014-1 (mixed) Colour (visual) beige paste grey paste grey paste Specific gravity ca. 1.6 ca. 1.6 ca. 1.6 Viscosity at 25°C (Pas) ca. 100 thixotropic thixotropic Pot Life (100 gm at 25 C) - - 60 minutes Shelf life (2-40 C) 3 years 3 years - Processing Pretreatment The strength and durability of a bonded joint are dependant on proper treatment of the surfaces to be bonded. At the very least, joint surfaces should be cleaned with a good degreasing agent such as acetone or other proprietary degreasing agents in order to remove all traces of oil, grease and dirt. Low grade alcohol, gasoline (petrol) or paint thinners should never be used. The strongest and most durable joints are obtained by either mechanically abrading or chemically etching ( pickling ) the degreased surfaces. Abrading should be followed by a second degreasing treatment. Mix ratio Parts by weight Parts by volume Araldite 2014-1/A 100 100 Araldite 2014-1/B 50 50 Araldite 2014-1 is available in cartridges incorporating mixers and can be applied as ready to use adhesive with the aid of the tool recommended by Huntsman Advanced Materials. April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 2/6 Application of adhesive The resin/hardener mix may be applied manually or robotically to the pretreated and dry joint surfaces. Huntsman's technical support group can assist the user in the selection of an suitable application method as well as suggest a variety of reputable companies that manufacture and service adhesive dispensing equipment. A layer of adhesive 0.05 to 0.10 mm thick will normally impart the greatest lap shear strength to the joint. Huntsman stresses that proper adhesive joint design is also critical for a durable bond. The joint components should be assembled and secured in a fixed position as soon as the adhesive has been applied. For more detailed explanations regarding surface preparation and pretreatment, adhesive joint design, and the dual syringe dispensing system, visit www.araldite2000plus.com. Equipment maintenance All tools should be cleaned with hot water and soap before adhesives residues have had time to cure. The removal of cured residues is a difficult and time-consuming operation. If solvents such as acetone are used for cleaning, operatives should take the appropriate precautions and, in addition, avoid skin and eye contact. Times to minimum shear strength Temperature C 10 15 23 40 60 100 Cure time to reach hours 14 8 3 - - - LSS > 1MPa minutes - - - 60 15 3 Cure time to reach hours 20 11 5 - - - LSS > 10MPa minutes - - - 80 20 4 LSS = Lap shear strength. Typical cured properties Unless otherwise stated, the figures given below were all determined by testing standard specimens made by lapjointing 114 x 25 x 1.6 mm strips of aluminium alloy. The joint area was 12.5 x 25 mm in each case. The figures were determined with typical production batches using standard testing methods. They are provided solely as technical information and do not constitute a product specification. Average lap shear strengths of typical metal-to-metal joints (ISO 4587) Cured for 16 hours at 40°C and tested at 23 C Pretreatment - Sand blasting 0 5 10 15 20 25 Aluminium Steel 37/11 Stainless steel V4A Galvanised steel Copper Brass MPa April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 3/6 Average lap shear strengths of typical plastic-to-plastic joints (ISO 4587) Cured for 16 hours at 40 C and tested at 23 C. Pretreatment - Lightly abrade and alcohol degrease. 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 GRP CFRP SMC ABS PVC PMMA Polycarbonate Polyamides MPa Lap shear strength versus temperature (ISO 4587) (typical average values) Cure: (a) = 7 days /23 C; (b) = 24 hours/23 C + 30 minutes/80 C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 °C -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 MPa a b Roller peel test (ISO 4578) Cured: 16 hours/40 C 3.0 N/mm Glass transition temperature (DSC) Cure: 24 hours at 23 C plus 1 hour at 80 C: ca. 85 C Shear modulus (DIN 53445) Cure: 16 hours/40 C 50 C - 1.2 GPa 75 C - 400 MPa 100 C - 180 Mpa 125 C - 20 Mpa E - modulus (ISO R527) at 23 C 4 GPa April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 4/6 Flexural Properties (ISO 178) Cure 16 hours/ 40ºC Cure 1 day/ 23°C +30mins/ 80°C tested at 23°C Flexural Strength 61 MPa Flexural Modulus 4355 MPa Tensile strength (ISO R527) at 23 C 26 MPa Elongation at break 0,7% Lap shear strength versus immersion in various media (typical average values) Unless otherwise stated, L.S.S. was determined after immersion for 90 days at 23 C 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 As-made value IMS Gasoline (petrol) Ethyl acetate Acetic acid, 10% Xylene Lubricating oil Paraffin Water at 23°C Water at 60°C Water at 90°C 30 days 60 days 90 days MPa Cure: 16 hour/40°C Lap shear strength versus tropical weathering (40/92, DIN 50015; typical average values) Cure: 16 hours/40C Test: at 23 C 0 5 10 15 20 25 As made value After 30 days After 60 days After 90 days MPa April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 5/6 Lap shear strength versus heat ageing Cure: 16 hours/40 C 0 5 10 15 20 25 As-made value 30 days/ 70°C 60 days/ 70°C 90 days/ 70°C MPa April 2007 Araldite® 2014-1 6/6 Huntsman Advanced Materials All recommendations for the use of our products, whether given by us in writing, verbally, or to be implied from the results of tests carried out by us, are based on the current state of our knowledge. Notwithstanding any such recommendations the Buyer shall remain responsible for satisfying himself that the products as supplied by us are suitable for his intended process or purpose. Since we cannot control the application, use or processing of the products, we cannot accept responsibility therefor. The Buyer shall ensure that the intended use of the products will not infringe any third party s intellectual property rights. We warrant that our products are free from defects in accordance with and subject to our general conditions of supply. Storage Araldite 2014-1A and Araldite 2014-1/B may be stored for up to 3 years at room temperature provided the components are stored in sealed containers. The expiry date is indicated on the label. Handling precautions Caution Our products are generally quite harmless to handle provided that certain precautions normally taken when handling chemicals are observed. The uncured materials must not, for instance, be allowed to come into contact with foodstuffs or food utensils, and measures should be taken to prevent the uncured materials from coming in contact with the skin, since people with particularly sensitive skin may be affected. The wearing of impervious rubber or plastic gloves will normally be necessary; likewise the use of eye protection. The skin should be thoroughly cleansed at the end of each working period by washing with soap and warm water. The use of solvents is to be avoided. Disposable paper - not cloth towels - should be used to dry the skin. Adequate ventilation of the working area is recommended. These precautions are described in greater detail in the Material Safety Data sheets for the individual products and should be referred to for fuller information. Huntsman Advanced Materials (Switzerland) GmbH Klybeckstrasse 200 4057 Basel Switzerland Tel: +41 (0)61 966 33 33 Fax: +41 (0)61 966 35 19 www.huntsman.com/advanced_materials Huntsman Advanced Materials warrants only that its products meet the specifications agreed with the buyer. Typical properties, where stated, are to be considered as representative of current production and should not be treated as specifications. The manufacture of materials is the subject of granted patents and patent applications; freedom to operate patented processes is not implied by this publication. While all the information and recommendations in this publication are, to the best of our knowledge, information and belief, accurate at the date of publication, NOTHING HEREIN IS TO BE CONSTRUED AS A WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR OTHERWISE. IN ALL CASES, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO DETERMINE THE APPLICABILITY OF SUCH INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS AND THE SUITABILITY OF ANY PRODUCT FOR ITS OWN PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The behaviour of the products referred to in this publication in manufacturing processes and their suitability in any given end-use environment are dependent upon various conditions such as chemical compatibility, temperature, and other variables, which are not known to Huntsman Advanced Materials. It is the responsibility of the user to evaluate the manufacturing circumstances and the final product under actual end-use requirements and to adequately advise and warn purchasers and users thereof. Products may be toxic and require special precautions in handling. The user should obtain Safety Data Sheets from Huntsman Advanced Materials containing detailed information on toxicity, together with proper shipping, handling and storage procedures, and should comply with all applicable safety and environmental standards. Hazards, toxicity and behaviour of the products may differ when used with other materials and are dependent on manufacturing circumstances or other processes. Such hazards, toxicity and behaviour should be determined by the user and made known to handlers, processors and end users. Except where explicitly agreed otherwise, the sale of products referred to in this publication is subject to the general terms and conditions of sale of Huntsman Advanced Materials LLC or of its affiliated companies including without limitation, Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe) BVBA, Huntsman Advanced Materials Americas Inc., and Huntsman Advanced Materials (Hong Kong) Ltd. Huntsman Advanced Materials is an international business unit of Huntsman Corporation. Huntsman Advanced Materials trades through Huntsman affiliated companies in different countries including but not limited to Huntsman Advanced Materials LLC in the USA and Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe) BVBA in Europe. [Araldite® 2014-1] is a registered trademark of Huntsman Corporation or an affiliate thereof. Copyright © 2007 Huntsman Corporation or an affiliate thereof. All rights reserved. Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France : 1.1 Identifiant du produit 1.3 Renseignements concernant le fournisseur de la fiche de données de sécurité Adresse email de la personne responsable pour cette FDS : Global_Product_EHS_AdMat@huntsman.com Description du produit : Non disponible. 1.2 Utilisations identifiées pertinentes de la substance ou du mélange et utilisations déconseillées SECTION 1: Identification de la substance/du mélange et de la société/l’entreprise Code du produit : 00057058 1.4 Numéro d’appel d’urgence Organisme de conseil/centre antipoison national Fournisseur Numéro de téléphone : EUROPE: +32 35 75 1234 France ORFILA: +33(0)145425959 ASIA: +65 6336-6011 China: +86 20 39377888 Australia: 1800 786 152 New Zealand: 0800 767 437 USA: +1/800/424.9300 Système Utilisation du produit : adhésif bi-composants Fournisseur : Huntsman Advanced Materials (Europe)BVBA Everslaan 45 3078 Everberg / Belgium Tel.: +41 61 299 20 41 Fax: +41 61 299 20 40 France : ORFILA 01.45.42.59.59 - Hors de France : +33.(0)1.45.42.59.59 Classification Xi; R41, R38 R43 N; R51/53 : Dangers pour la santé : humaine Risque de lésions oculaires graves. Irritant pour la peau. Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau. Dangers pour : l’environnement Toxique pour les organismes aquatiques, peut entraîner des effets néfastes à long terme pour l'environnement aquatique. Pour plus de détails sur les conséquences en termes de santé et les symptômes, reportez-vous à la section 11. SECTION 2: Identification des dangers 2.1 Classification de la substance ou du mélange Définition du produit : Working pack (preparation) Voir section 16 pour le texte intégral des phrases R et mentions H déclarées ci-dessus. Classification selon la directive 1999/45/CE [DPD] Le produit est classé dangereux selon la directive 1999/45/CE et ses amendements. 2.2 Éléments d’étiquetage Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 1/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 2/19 SECTION 2: Identification des dangers Autres dangers qui ne : donnent pas lieu à une classification Non disponible. Récipients devant être pourvus d'une fermeture de sécurité pour les enfants Non applicable. Avertissement tactile de danger Non applicable. : : Exigences d‘emballages spéciaux Symbole(s) de danger Conseils de prudence S26- En cas de contact avec les yeux, laver immédiatement et abondamment avec de l'eau et consulter un spécialiste. S39- Porter un appareil de protection des yeux/du visage. S61- Éviter le rejet dans l'environnement. Consulter les instructions spéciales/la fiche de données de sécurité. R41- Risque de lésions oculaires graves. R38- Irritant pour la peau. R43- Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau. R51/53- Toxique pour les organismes aquatiques, peut entraîner des effets néfastes à long terme pour l'environnement aquatique. Phrases de risque Ingrédients dangereux : : : : Irritant, Dangereux pour l'environnement produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F éther diglycidique du 1,4-butanediol N(3-diméthylaminopropyl)-1,3-propylènediamine Indication de danger : 2.3 Autres dangers Éléments d’étiquetage supplémentaires : Contient des composés époxydiques. Voir les informations transmises par le fabricant. Substance/préparation : Working pack (preparation) Nom du Identifiants 67/548/CEE produit/composant SECTION 3: Composition/informations sur les composants % Règlement (CE) Type n° 1272/2008 [CLP] Classification produit de réaction: bisphénol-Aépichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) REACH #: 01- 2119456619-26 CAS: 25068-38-6 13 - 30 Xi; R36/38 R43 N; R51/53 Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Eye Irrit. 2, H319 Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 [1] résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F REACH #: 01- 2119454392-40 CAS: 9003-36-5 3 - 7 Xi; R36/38 R43 N; R51/53 Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Eye Irrit. 2, H319 Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 [1] éther diglycidique du 1,4-butanediol REACH #: 01- 2119494060-45 CAS: 2425-79-8 1 - 3 Xn; R20/21 Xi; R36/38 Acute Tox. 4, H312 Acute Tox. 4, H332 [1] Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 2/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 3/19 SECTION 3: Composition/informations sur les composants Les limites d'exposition professionnelle, quand elles sont disponibles, sont énumérées à la section 8. Dans l'état actuel des connaissances du fournisseur et dans les concentrations d'application, aucun autre ingrédient présent n'est classé comme dangereux pour la santé ou l'environnement, et donc nécessiterait de figurer dans cette section. Voir section 16 pour le texte intégral des phrases R mentionnées cidessus Voir section 16 pour le texte intégral des mentions H déclarées ci-dessus. R43 R52/53 Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Eye Irrit. 2, H319 Skin Sens. 1, H317 N(3- diméthylaminopropyl)- 1,3-propylènediamine CAS: 10563-29-8 1 - 3 Xn; R21/22 C; R34 R43 Acute Tox. 4, H302 Acute Tox. 4, H312 Skin Corr. 1B, H314 Eye Dam. 1, H318 Skin Sens. 1, H317 [1] diglycidylester de l'acide téréphthalique CAS: 7195-44-0 0.1 - 1 Xi; R36/38 R43 N; R51/53 Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Eye Irrit. 2, H319 Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 [1] triglycidylester de l'acide trimellitique CAS: 7237-83-4 0.1 - 1 Xi; R36/38 R43 N; R51/53 Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Eye Irrit. 2, H319 Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 [1] [1] Substance classée avec un danger pour la santé ou l'environnement [2] Substance avec une limite d'exposition au poste de travail [3] La substance remplit les critères des PTB selon le Règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006, Annexe XIII [4] La substance remplit les critères des tPtB selon le Règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006, Annexe XIII Type Contact avec la peau Consulter un médecin immédiatement. Rincer immédiatement les yeux à grande eau, en soulevant de temps en temps les paupières supérieures et inférieures. Vérifier si la victime porte des verres de contact et dans ce cas, les lui enlever. Continuez de rincer pendant 10 minutes au moins. Les brûlures chimiques doivent être traitées sans tarder par un médecin. Rincer la peau contaminée à grande eau. Retirer les vêtements et les chaussures contaminés. Laver abondamment à l'eau les vêtements contaminés avant de les retirer, ou porter des gants. Continuez de rincer pendant 10 minutes au moins. Consulter un médecin. En cas d'affections ou de symptômes, évitez d'exposer plus longuement. Laver les vêtements avant de les réutiliser. Laver les chaussures à fond avant de les remettre. 4.1 Description des premiers secours Transporter la victime à l'extérieur et la maintenir au repos dans une position où elle peut confortablement respirer. S'il ne respire pas, en cas de respiration irrégulière ou d'arrêt respiratoire, que le personnel qualifié pratique la respiration artificielle ou administre de l'oxygène. Il peut être dangereux pour la personne assistant une victime de pratiquer le bouche à bouche. Appelez un médecin en cas de persistance ou d'aggravation des effets néfastes sur la santé. En cas d'évanouissement, placez la personne en position latérale de sécurité et appelez un médecin immédiatement. Assurez-vous d'une bonne circulation d'air. Détacher tout ce qui pourrait être serré, comme un col, une cravate, une ceinture ou un ceinturon. En cas d’inhalation de produits de décomposition lors d’un incendie, les symptômes peuvent être différés. La personne exposée peut avoir besoin de rester sous surveillance médicale pendant 48 heures. Inhalation Contact avec les yeux : : : SECTION 4: Premiers secours Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 3/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 4/19 SECTION 4: Premiers secours Rincez la bouche avec de l'eau. Enlever les prothèses dentaires s'il y a lieu. Transporter la victime à l'extérieur et la maintenir au repos dans une position où elle peut confortablement respirer. Si une personne a avalé de ce produit et est consciente, lui faire boire de petites quantités d’eau. Si la personne est indisposée, cesser de la faire boire car des vomissements pourraient entraîner un risque supplémentaire. Ne pas faire vomir sauf indication contraire émanant du personnel médical. En cas de vomissement, maintenez la tête vers le bas pour empêcher le passage des vomissures dans les poumons. Appelez un médecin en cas de persistance ou d'aggravation des effets néfastes sur la santé. Ne rien faire ingérer à une personne inconsciente. En cas d'évanouissement, placez la personne en position latérale de sécurité et appelez un médecin immédiatement. Assurez-vous d'une bonne circulation d'air. Détacher tout ce qui pourrait être serré, comme un col, une cravate, une ceinture ou un ceinturon. Note au médecin traitant En cas d’inhalation de produits de décomposition lors d’un incendie, les symptômes peuvent être différés. La personne exposée peut avoir besoin de rester sous surveillance médicale pendant 48 heures. Ingestion : : Traitements spécifiques Protection des sauveteurs : Aucune initiative ne doit être prise qui implique un risque individuel ou en l’absence de formation appropriée. Il peut être dangereux pour la personne assistant une victime de pratiquer le bouche à bouche. Laver abondamment à l'eau les vêtements contaminés avant de les retirer, ou porter des gants. 4.2 Effets et symptômes les plus importants, aigus ou différés Effets aigus potentiels sur la santé Inhalation : L'exposition aux produits de décomposition peut présenter des risques pour la santé. Les effets graves d’une exposition peuvent être différés. Irritant pour la bouche, Ingestion : la gorge et l'estomac. Contact avec la peau : Irritant pour la peau. Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau. Contact avec les yeux : Gravement irritant pour les yeux. Risque de lésions oculaires graves. Signes/symptômes de surexposition Contact avec la peau Ingestion Inhalation Aucune donnée spécifique. Aucune donnée spécifique. Les symptômes néfastes peuvent éventuellement comprendre ce qui suit: irritation rougeur : : : Contact avec les yeux : Les symptômes néfastes peuvent éventuellement comprendre ce qui suit: douleur ou irritation larmoiement rougeur 4.3 Indication quant à la nécessité d’une prise en charge médicale immédiate ou d’un traitement spécial : Traitement symptomatique et thérapie de soutien comme indiqué. Après une exposition sévère le patient doit être gardé sous contrôle médical pendant au moins 48 heures. Utiliser un agent extincteur approprié pour étouffer l'incendie avoisinant. 5.1 Moyens d’extinction Aucun connu. Moyens d’extinction appropriés : Moyens d’extinction inappropriés : SECTION 5: Mesures de lutte contre l’incendie 5.2 Dangers particuliers résultant de la substance ou du mélange Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 4/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 5/19 SECTION 5: Mesures de lutte contre l’incendie En présence d'incendie, circonscrire rapidement le site en évacuant toute personne se trouvant près des lieux de l'accident. Aucune initiative ne doit être prise qui implique un risque individuel ou en l’absence de formation appropriée. Ce produit est toxique pour les organismes aquatiques. L'eau du réseau d'extinction d'incendie qui a été contaminée par ce produit doit être conservée en milieu fermé et ne doit être déversée ni dans le milieu aquatique, ni aucun égout ou conduit d'évacuation. Risque lié aux produits de décomposition thermique Dangers dus à la substance ou au mélange Les produits de décomposition peuvent éventuellement comprendre les substances suivantes: dioxyde de carbone monoxyde de carbone oxydes d'azote oxydes de soufre oxyde/oxydes de métal L’augmentation de pression résultant d’un incendie ou d’une exposition à des températures élevées peut provoquer l’explosion du conteneur. Les pompiers devront porter un équipement de protection approprié ainsi qu'un appareil de protection respiratoire autonome avec masque intégral fonctionnant en mode pression positive. Les vêtements pour sapeurs-pompiers (y compris casques, bottes de protection et gants) conformes à la Norme européenne EN 469 procurent un niveau de protection de base contre les accidents chimiques. Équipement de protection spécial pour le personnel préposé à la lutte contre l'incendie : : : 5.3 Conseils aux pompiers Précautions spéciales pour les pompiers : 6.2 Précautions pour la protection de l’environnement Arrêter la fuite si cela ne présente aucun risque. Écarter les conteneurs de la zone de déversement accidentel. S'approcher des émanations dans la même direction que le vent. Bloquer toute pénétration possible dans les égouts, les cours d’eau, les caves ou les zones confinées. Laver le produit répandu dans une installation de traitement des effluents ou procéder comme suit. Contenir les fuites et les ramasser à l'aide de matières absorbantes non combustibles telles que le sable, la terre, la vermiculite, la terre à diatomées. Les placer ensuite dans un récipient pour élimination conformément à la réglementation locale. Élimination par une entreprise Évitez la dispersion des matériaux déversés, ainsi que leur écoulement et tout contact avec le sol, les cours d'eau, les égouts et conduits d'évacuation. Informez les autorités compétentes en cas de pollution de l'environnement (égouts, voies d'eau, sol et air) par le produit. Matière propre à polluer l’eau. Peut-être nocif pour l'environnement en cas de déversement de grandes quantités. Grand déversement accidentel : Arrêter la fuite si cela ne présente aucun risque. Écarter les conteneurs de la zone de déversement accidentel. Diluer avec de l'eau et éponger si la matière est soluble dans l'eau. Sinon, ou si la matière est insoluble dans l'eau, absorber avec un matériau sec inerte et placer dans un conteneur à déchets approprié. Élimination par une entreprise autorisée de collecte des déchets. Petit déversement accidentel : 6.3 Méthodes et matériel de confinement et de nettoyage SECTION 6: Mesures à prendre en cas de dispersion accidentelle 6.1 Précautions individuelles, équipement de protection et procédures d’urgence Pour le personnel autre que le personnel d’intervention : Pour les agents d'intervention : Aucune initiative ne doit être prise qui implique un risque individuel ou en l’absence de formation appropriée. Évacuer les environs. Empêcher l'accès aux personnes non requises et ne portant pas de vêtements de protection. NE PAS TOUCHER ni marcher dans le produit répandu. Éviter de respirer les vapeurs ou le brouillard. Assurer une ventilation adéquate. Porter un appareil de protection respiratoire approprié lorsque le système de ventilation est inadéquat. Porter un équipement de protection individuelle adapté. Si des vêtements spécifiques sont nécessaires pour traiter le déversement, consulter la section 8 pour les matériaux appropriés et inappropriés. Voir également la section 8 pour plus d'informations sur les mesures d'hygiène. : Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 5/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 6/19 SECTION 6: Mesures à prendre en cas de dispersion accidentelle autorisée de collecte des déchets. Les matériaux absorbants contaminés peuvent présenter les mêmes risques que le produit répandu. 6.4 Référence à d’autres sections Voir section 1 pour les coordonnées d'urgence. Voir la section 8 pour toute information sur les équipements de protection individuelle adaptés. Voir la section 13 pour toute information supplémentaire sur le traitement des déchets. : Stocker entre les températures suivantes: 2 à 40°C (35.6 à 104°F). Stocker conformément à la réglementation locale. Stocker dans le récipient d'origine à l'abri de la lumière directe du soleil dans un endroit sec, frais et bien ventilé à l'écart des matériaux incompatibles (cf. la section 10). Garder le récipient hermétiquement fermé lorsque le produit n'est pas utilisé. Les récipients ayant été ouverts doivent être refermés avec soin et maintenus en position verticale afin d'éviter les fuites. Ne pas stocker dans des conteneurs non étiquetés. Utiliser un récipient approprié pour éviter toute contamination du milieu ambiant. SECTION 7: Manipulation et stockage Les informations de cette section contiennent des directives et des conseils généraux. Consulter la liste des Utilisations Identifiées de la section 1 pour toute information spécifique aux usages disponible dans le(s) scénario(s) d'exposition. 7.1 Précautions à prendre pour une manipulation sans danger Mesures de protection : Conseils sur l'hygiène professionnelle en général : 7.2 Conditions d’un stockage sûr, y compris d’éventuelles incompatibilités 7.3 Utilisations finales spécifiques Recommandations : Solutions spécifiques au : secteur industriel Non disponible. Non disponible. Revêtir un équipement de protection individuelle approprié (voir Section 8). Les personnes ayant des antécédents de sensibilisation cutanée ne doivent pas intervenir dans les processus utilisant ce produit. Ne pas mettre en contact avec les yeux, la peau ou les vêtements. Ne pas ingérer. Éviter de respirer les vapeurs ou le brouillard. Éviter le rejet dans l'environnement. Consulter les instructions spéciales/la fiche de données de sécurité. Garder dans le conteneur d'origine ou dans un autre conteneur de substitution homologué fabriqué à partir d'un matériau compatible et tenu hermétiquement clos lorsqu'il n'est pas utilisé. Les conteneurs vides retiennent des résidus de produit et peuvent présenter un danger. Ne pas réutiliser ce conteneur. Il est interdit de manger, boire ou fumer dans les endroits où ce produit est manipulé, entreposé ou mis en oeuvre. Il est recommandé au personnel de se laver les mains et la figure avant de manger, boire ou fumer. Retirer les vêtements contaminés et les équipements de protection avant d'entrer dans un lieu de restauration. Voir également la section 8 pour plus d'informations sur les mesures d'hygiène. : Classe de danger de stockage Huntsman Advanced Materials : Classe de stockage 10, Liquide nocif pour l'ambience Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 6/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 7/19 Procédures de surveillance recommandées Limites d'exposition professionnelle Si ce produit contient des ingrédients présentant des limites d'exposition, il peut s'avérer nécessaire d'effectuer un examen suivi des personnes, de l'atmosphère sur le lieu de travail ou des organismes vivants pour déterminer l'efficacité de la ventilation ou d'autres mesures de contrôle ou évaluer le besoin d'utiliser du matériel de protection des voies respiratoires. Il importe de vous reporter à la norme européenne EN 689 concernant les méthodes pour évaluer l'exposition par inhalation aux agents chimiques et aux documents de politique générale nationaux relatifs aux méthodes pour déterminer les substances dangereuses. Protection des mains Le port de gants imperméables et résistants aux produits chimiques conformes à une norme approuvée, est obligatoire en tout temps lors de la manutention de produits chimiques si une évaluation des risques le préconise. Utiliser une protection oculaire conforme à une norme approuvée dès lors qu'une évaluation du risque indique qu'il est nécessaire d'éviter l'exposition aux projections de liquides, aux fines particules pulvérisées ou aux poussières. Protection oculaire/faciale Aucune valeur de limite d'exposition connue. : : : Protection de la peau Contrôles d’ingénierie appropriés : Aucune ventilation particulière requise. Une bonne ventilation générale devrait être suffisante pour contrôler l'exposition du technicien aux contaminants en suspension dans l'air. Si ce produit contient des composants pour lesquels des contraintes liées à l'exposition existent, utiliser des enceintes de protection, une ventilation locale par aspiration, ou d'autres moyens de contrôle automatiques intégrés afin de maintenir le seuil d'exposition du technicien inférieur aux limites recommandées ou légales. Se laver abondamment les mains, les avant-bras et le visage après avoir manipulé des produits chimiques, avant de manger, de fumer et d'aller aux toilettes ainsi qu'à la fin de la journée de travail. Il est recommandé d'utiliser les techniques appropriées pour retirer les vêtements potentiellement contaminés. Les vêtements de travail contaminés ne devraient pas sortir du lieu de travail. Laver les vêtements contaminés avant de les réutiliser. S'assurer que les dispositifs rince-oeil automatiques et les douches de sécurité se trouvent à proximité de l'emplacement des postes de travail. 8.2 Contrôles de l’exposition Mesures d'hygiène : Aucune DEL disponible. Concentrations prédites avec effet Aucune PEC disponible. SECTION 8: Contrôles de l’exposition/protection individuelle Les informations de cette section contiennent des directives et des conseils généraux. Consulter la liste des Utilisations Identifiées de la section 1 pour toute information spécifique aux usages disponible dans le(s) scénario(s) d'exposition. 8.1 Paramètres de contrôle Doses dérivées avec effet Mesures de protection individuelles Les limites d'exposition sur la place de travail doivent être dans les normes (poussière totale, poussière de quartz potentiellement inhalable). Si les limites sont dépassées, portez un masque à poussière approprié. A T T E N T I O N ! Ce produit contient du quartz, classé par l'IARC parmi les substances carcinogènes pour l'homme (Groupe 1), pouvant causer une silicose ou un cancer des poumons par inhalation des poussières. Il est donc important d'éviter de s'exposer à toute inhalation lors des opérations mécaniques effectuées avec le produit fini (mouture, décapage, coupe...). QUARTZ (CAS RN 14808-60-7): France: TWA: 0.1 mg/m³ 8 hour(s). Form: respirable aerosol Suisse: TWA: 0.15 mg/m³ 8 hour(s). Form: respirable dust Belgique: TWA: 0.1 mg/m³ 8 hour(s). Form: respirable dust Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 7/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 8/19 SECTION 8: Contrôles de l’exposition/protection individuelle Lorsque la ventilation du local est insuffisante, porter un équipement de protection respiratoire. Le choix de l'appareil de protection respiratoire doit être fondé sur les niveaux d'expositions prévus ou connus, les dangers du produit et les limites d'utilisation sans danger de l'appareil de protection respiratoire retenu. Protection respiratoire : L'équipement de protection personnel pour le corps devra être choisi en fonction de la tâche à réaliser ainsi que des risques encourus, et il est recommandé de le faire valider par un spécialiste avant de procéder à la manipulation du produit. : Contrôle de l'exposition de l'environnement : Il importe de tester les émissions provenant des systèmes de ventilation ou du matériel de fabrication pour vous assurer qu'elles sont conformes aux exigences de la législation sur la protection de l'environnement. Dans certains cas, il sera nécessaire d'équiper le matériel de fabrication d'un épurateur de gaz ou d'un filtre ou de le modifier techniquement afin de réduire les émissions à des niveaux acceptables. Protection corporelle : Autre protection cutanée Des chaussures adéquates et toutes mesures de protection corporelle devraient être déterminées en fonction de l'opération effectuée et des risques impliqués, et devraient être approuvées par un spécialiste avant toute manipulation de ce produit. Alcool éthylvinylique laminé (EVAL), caoutchouc butyle néoprène, Matériaux pour gants caoutchouc nitrile pour utilisation à court terme/projection (10 min480 min): Non disponible. État physique Point de fusion/point de congélation Point d'ébullition initial et intervalle d'ébullition Liquide. [Pâte.] Non disponible. Odeur Non disponible. pH Couleur Non disponible. Vitesse d'évaporation Non disponible. Point d'éclair Vase clos: >100°C [DIN 51758 EN 22719 (Pensky-Martens Closed Cup)] Non disponible. Non disponible. Seuil d'odeur Non disponible. Limites supérieures/inférieures d'inflammabilité ou d'explosion : : : : : : : : : : 9.1 Informations sur les propriétés physiques et chimiques essentielles Aspect Durée de combustion Non applicable. Vitesse de combustion Non applicable. : : SECTION 9: Propriétés physiques et chimiques Inflammabilité (solide, gaz) : Non disponible. Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 8/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 9/19 SECTION 9: Propriétés physiques et chimiques Pression de vapeur Densité relative Densité de vapeur Solubilité(s) Non disponible. Non disponible. Non disponible. Température d'autoinflammation Non disponible. Non disponible. Non disponible. Viscosité Non disponible. Coefficient de partage noctanol/ eau Propriétés d'explosivité : : : : : : : Propriétés comburantes : Non disponible. 9.2 Autres informations Température de décomposition : Non disponible. Masse volumique : 1.4 g/cm3 [20°C (68°F)] Solubilité dans l'eau : 10.6 Produits de décomposition dangereux 10.4 Conditions à éviter Aucune donnée spécifique. Dans des conditions normales de stockage et d'utilisation, aucun produit de décomposition dangereux ne devrait apparaître. 10.2 Stabilité chimique Le produit est stable. Aucune donnée spécifique. : : : 10.5 Matières incompatibles : 10.3 Possibilité de réactions dangereuses : Dans des conditions normales de stockage et d'utilisation, aucune réaction dangereuse ne se produit. SECTION 10: Stabilité et réactivité 10.1 Réactivité : Aucune donnée d'essai spécifique relative à la réactivité n'est disponible pour ce produit ou ses composants. Toxicité aiguë produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) CL0 Inhalation Vapeurs Rat - Mâle 0.00001 ppm 5 heures DL50 Cutané Rat - Mâle, Femelle >2000 mg/kg - DL50 Orale Rat - Femelle >2000 mg/kg - résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F DL50 Cutané Rat - Mâle, Femelle >2000 mg/kg - DL50 Orale Rat - Mâle, >5000 mg/kg - Nom du produit/composant Endpoint Espèces Résultat Exposition SECTION 11: Informations toxicologiques 11.1 Informations sur les effets toxicologiques Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 9/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 10/19 SECTION 11: Informations toxicologiques Femelle éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol DL50 Cutané Rat - Mâle, Femelle >2150 mg/kg - DL50 Orale Rat - Mâle, Femelle 1163 mg/kg - N(3-diméthylaminopropyl)- 1,3-propylènediamine DL50 Cutané Lapin 1310 mg/kg - DL50 Orale Rat 1670 mg/kg - Mutagénicité Irritation/Corrosion produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 404 Effet irritant/corrosif aigu sur la peau Lapin Faiblement irritant OECD 405 Effet irritant/corrosif aigu sur les yeux Lapin Faiblement irritant résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F OECD 405 Effet irritant/corrosif aigu sur les yeux Lapin Non irritant. OECD 404 Effet irritant/corrosif aigu sur la peau Lapin Faiblement irritant éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol OECD 404 Effet irritant/corrosif aigu sur la peau Lapin Non irritant. OECD 405 Effet irritant/corrosif aigu sur les yeux Lapin Irritant puissant Nom du produit/composant Test Résultat Conclusion/Résumé : Peau : produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700): Légèrement irritant pour la peau. résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F: Légèrement irritant pour la peau. éther diglycidique du 1,4-butanediol: Non irritant pour la peau. Yeux : produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700): Légèrement irritant pour les yeux. résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F: Non irritant pour les yeux. éther diglycidique du 1,4-butanediol: Gravement irritant pour les yeux. Non disponible. Sensibilisant produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 429 Sensibilisation cutanée : essai des ganglions lymphatiques locaux peau Souris Sensibilisant résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F OECD 429 Sensibilisation cutanée : essai des ganglions lymphatiques locaux peau Souris Sensibilisant éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol OECD 406 Sensibilisation de la peau peau cobaye Sensibilisant Nom du produit/composant Test Voie d'exposition Résultat Conclusion/Résumé : Non disponible. Espèces Espèces Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 10/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 11/19 SECTION 11: Informations toxicologiques Cancérogénicité produit de réaction: bisphénol-Aépichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 453 Etudes combinées de toxicité chronique et de cancérogénèse Rat 2 années; 7 jours par semaine Négatif Orale - OECD 453 Etudes combinées de toxicité chronique et de cancérogénèse Rat 2 années; 5 jours par semaine Négatif Cutané - OECD 453 Etudes combinées de toxicité chronique et de cancérogénèse Souris 2 années; 3 jours par semaine Négatif Cutané - Nom du produit/composant Test Espèces Exposition Résultat produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 471 Essai de mutation réverse sur des bactéries Positif OECD 476 Essai in vitro de mutation génique sur des cellules de mammifères Positif OECD 478 Toxicologie génétique : Essai de mutation létale dominante chez le rongeur Négatif EPA OPPTS Négatif résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F OECD 471 Essai de mutation réverse sur des bactéries Positif OECD 476 Essai in vitro de mutation génique sur des cellules de mammifères Positif OECD 473 Essai d'aberration chromosomique in vitro chez les mammifères Positif OECD 474 Le test de micronoyaux sur les érythrocytes de mammifère Négatif OECD 486 Essai de synthèse non programmée de l’ADN (UDS) sur des hépatocytes de mammifères in vivo Négatif éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol OECD 471 Essai de mutation réverse sur des bactéries Positif OECD 473 Essai d'aberration chromosomique in vitro chez les mammifères Positif OECD 474 Le test de micronoyaux sur les érythrocytes de mammifère Négatif Nom du produit/composant Test Résultat Conclusion/Résumé : Non disponible. Toxicité pour la reproduction Nom du produit/composant Test Espèces Résultat/Type de résultat Organes cibles Voie d'exposition Organes cibles Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 11/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 12/19 SECTION 11: Informations toxicologiques Effets chroniques potentiels pour la santé Effets aigus potentiels sur la santé Inhalation : L'exposition aux produits de décomposition peut présenter des risques pour la santé. Les effets graves d’une exposition peuvent être différés. Irritant pour la bouche, Ingestion : la gorge et l'estomac. Contact avec la peau : Irritant pour la peau. Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau. Contact avec les yeux : Gravement irritant pour les yeux. Risque de lésions oculaires graves. Nom du produit/composant Test Type de résultat Résultat Organes cibles Tératogénicité produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 414 Etude de la toxicité pour le développement prénatal Rat - Femelle >540 mg/kg Pas d'effets observés à : EPA CFR Lapin - Femelle >300 mg/kg Pas d'effets observés à : OECD 414 Etude de la toxicité pour le développement prénatal Lapin - Femelle 180 mg/kg NOAEL résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F EPA CFR Lapin - Femelle >300 mg/kg Pas d'effets observés à : Nom du produit/composant Test Espèces Résultat/Type de résultat produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 416 Étude de toxicité pour la reproduction sur deux générations Rat Orale: 540 mg/kg Pas d'effets observés à : - résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F OECD 416 Étude de toxicité pour la reproduction sur deux générations Rat Orale: 540 mg/kg Pas d'effets observés à : - Symptômes correspondant aux caractéristiques physiques, chimiques et toxicologiques Contact avec la peau Ingestion Inhalation Aucune donnée spécifique. Aucune donnée spécifique. Les symptômes néfastes peuvent éventuellement comprendre ce qui suit: irritation rougeur : : : Contact avec les yeux : Les symptômes néfastes peuvent éventuellement comprendre ce qui suit: douleur ou irritation larmoiement rougeur Informations sur les voies Non disponible. d’exposition probables : Effets retardés, effets immédiats et effets chroniques d’une exposition à court ou long terme Exposition de courte durée Exposition prolongée Effets potentiels immédiats Effets potentiels différés : : Effets potentiels immédiats Effets potentiels différés : : Non disponible. Non disponible. Non disponible. Non disponible. Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 12/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 13/19 SECTION 11: Informations toxicologiques Une fois sensibilisé, une vive réaction allergique peut éventuellement se déclencher lors d'une exposition ultérieure à de très faibles niveaux. Généralités : Aucun effet important ou Cancérogénicité : danger critique connu. Mutagénicité : Aucun effet important ou danger critique connu. Tératogénicité : Aucun effet important ou danger critique connu. produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD 408 Toxicité orale à doses répétées –rongeurs : 90 jours NOAEL Subchronique NOAEL Oral 50 mg/kg - OECD 411 Toxicité cutanée subchronique : 90 jours Pas d'effets observés à : Subchronique Pas d'effets observés à : Dermal 10 mg/kg - OECD 411 Toxicité cutanée subchronique : 90 jours NOAEL Subchronique NOAEL Dermal 100 mg/kg - résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F OECD 408 Toxicité orale à doses répétées –rongeurs : 90 jours NOAEL Subchronique NOAEL Oral 250 mg/kg - éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol OECD 407 Toxicité orale à dose répétée - pendant 28 jours sur les rongeurs NOAEL Subchronique NOAEL Oral 200 mg/kg - Conclusion/Résumé : Non disponible. Effets sur le développement : Aucun effet important ou danger critique connu. Effets sur la fertilité : Aucun effet important ou danger critique connu. Autres informations : Non disponible. 12.1 Toxicité produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) - Aiguë CE50 72 heures Static Algues 9.4 mg/L OECD 202 Daphnia sp. Essai d'immobilisation immédiate Aiguë CE50 48 heures Static Daphnie 1.7 mg/L - Aiguë CI50 3 heures Static Bactéries >100 mg/L OECD 203 Poisson, essai de toxicité aiguë Aiguë CL50 96 heures Static Poisson 1.5 mg/L OECD 211 Daphnia magna, essai de reproduction Chronique NOEC 21 jours Semistatic Daphnie 0.3 mg/L résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F OECD 201 Algues, essai d'inhibition de la croissance Aiguë CE50 72 heures Static Algues 1.8 mg/L OECD OECD 202: Part I (Daphnia sp., Acute Immobilisation test) Aiguë CE50 48 heures Static Daphnie 1.6 mg/L - Aiguë CI50 3 heures Static Bactéries >100 mg/L OECD 203 Poisson, essai de Aiguë CL50 96 Poisson 0.55 mg/L Nom du produit/composant Exposition Espèces Résultat SECTION 12: Informations écologiques Test Endpoint Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 13/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 14/19 SECTION 12: Informations écologiques LogPow FBC Potentiel 12.3 Potentiel de bioaccumulation Nom du produit/composant produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) 3.242 31 faible résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F 2.7 à 3.6 - élevée éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol -0.269 - faible Nom du produit/composant Demi-vie aquatique Photolyse Biodégradabilité produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) Eau douce 4.83 jours Eau douce 3.58 jours Eau douce 7.1 jours - Non facilement résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F - - Non facilement éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol - - Non facilement toxicité aiguë heures Semistatic OECD 211 Daphnia magna, essai de reproduction Chronique NOEC 21 jours Semistatic Daphnie 0.3 mg/L éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol OECD 202 Daphnia sp. Essai d'immobilisation immédiate Aiguë CE50 24 heures Static Daphnie 75 mg/L OECD 201 Algues, essai d'inhibition de la croissance Aiguë EL50 72 heures Static Algues >160 mg/L OECD 209 Boue activée, essai d'inhibition de la respiration Aiguë CI50 3 heures Static Bactéries >100 mg/L OECD 203 Poisson, essai de toxicité aiguë Aiguë CL50 96 heures Static Poisson 24 mg/L 12.2 Persistance et dégradabilité produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700) OECD Derived from OECD 301F (Biodegradation Test) 28 jours 5 % résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F EU 28 jours 0 % éther diglycidique du 1,4- butanediol OECD 301F Biodégradabilité facile - Essai de respirometrie manométrique 28 jours 43 % Nom du produit/composant Test Résultat Conclusion/Résumé : produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700): Non facilement biodégradable. Période Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 14/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 15/19 SECTION 12: Informations écologiques Mobilité : Non disponible. 12.6 Autres effets néfastes Aucun effet important ou danger critique connu. 12.4 Mobilité dans le sol Coefficient de répartition sol/eau (KOC) : Non disponible. 12.5 Résultats de l'évaluation PTB et tPtB : 12.7 Autres renseignements écologiques Non applicable. Catalogue Européen des Déchets Déchets Dangereux : Oui. Il est recommandé d'éviter ou réduire autant que possible la production de déchets. Ne pas éliminer de quantités significatives de déchets résiduels du produit par les égouts. Les traiter dans une usine de traitement des eaux usées appropriée. Élimination des produits excédentaires et non recyclables par une entreprise autorisée de collecte des déchets. La mise au rebut de ce produit, des solutions et des sous-produits devra en permanence respecter les exigences légales en matière de protection de l'environnement et de mise au rebut des déchets ainsi que les exigences de toutes les autorités locales. Recycler les déchets d'emballage. Envisager l'incinération ou la mise en décharge uniquement si le recyclage est impossible. Ne se débarrasser de ce produit et de son récipient qu'en prenant toutes précautions d'usage. Manipuler avec prudence les récipients vides non nettoyés ni rincés. Les conteneurs vides ou les sachets internes peuvent retenir des restes de produit. Évitez la dispersion des matériaux déversés, ainsi que leur écoulement et tout contact avec le sol, les cours d'eau, les égouts et conduits d'évacuation. Méthodes d'élimination : des déchets SECTION 13: Considérations relatives à l’élimination Les informations de cette section contiennent des directives et des conseils généraux. Consulter la liste des Utilisations Identifiées de la section 1 pour toute information spécifique aux usages disponible dans le(s) scénario(s) d'exposition. 13.1 Méthodes de traitement des déchets Produit Emballage Code de déchets Désignation du déchet Méthodes d'élimination des déchets : Précautions particulières : 07 02 08* autres résidus de réaction et résidus de distillation Il est recommandé d'éviter ou réduire autant que possible la production de déchets. Recycler les déchets d'emballage. Envisager l'incinération ou la mise en décharge uniquement si le recyclage est impossible. Ne se débarrasser de ce produit et de son récipient qu'en prenant toutes précautions d'usage. Manipuler avec prudence les récipients vides non nettoyés ni rincés. Les conteneurs vides ou les sachets internes peuvent retenir des restes de produit. Évitez la dispersion des matériaux déversés, ainsi que leur écoulement et tout contact avec le sol, les cours d'eau, les égouts et conduits d'évacuation. Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 15/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 16/19 Matière dangereuse du point de vue de l'environnement, liquide, n.s.a. BISPHENOL A/F EPOXY RESIN 9 III Matière dangereuse du point de vue de l'environnement, liquide, n.s.a. (BISPHENOL A/F EPOXY RESIN) Polluant marin (produit de réaction: bisphénol-A-épichlorhydrine; résines époxydiques (poids moléculaire moyen < 700), résine époxidique à base de bisphénol F) 9 III Matière dangereuse du point de vue de l'environnement, liquide, n.s.a. (BISPHENOL A/F EPOXY RESIN) UN3082 9 non disponible non disponible III UN3082 UN3082 Numéro d'identification du danger 90 Dispositions particulières 274 335 601 Code tunnel E Emergency schedules (EmS) F-A, S-F Avion passager et avion cargoLimitation de quantité: 450 L Instructions d'emballage 964 Avion cargo uniquementLimitation de quantité: 450 L Instructions d'emballage 964 SECTION 14: Informations relatives au transport ADR/RID IMDG IATA 14.1 Numéro ONU 14.2 Désignation officielle de transport ONU 14.3 Classe(s) de danger pour le transport 14.4 Groupe d’emballage ADN/ADNR Autres informations 14.5 Dangers pour l’environnement 14.6 Précautions particulières à prendre par l’utilisateur 14.7 Transport en vrac conformément à l’annexe II de la convention Marpol 73/78 et au recueil IBC Oui. Oui. Yes. Non disponible. Non disponible. Non disponible. : Non applicable. ADN/ADNR IMDG IATA ADR/RID SECTION 15: Informations réglementaires 15.1 Réglementations/législation d'hygiène, sécurité et environnement spécifique à la substance ou au mélange Règlement UE (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH) Annexe XIV - Liste des substances soumises à autorisation Substances extrêmement préoccupantes Aucun des composants n'est répertorié. Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 16/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 17/19 SECTION 15: Informations réglementaires Réglementations nationales Autres Réglementations UE Annexe XVII - Restrictions Non applicable. applicables à la fabrication, à la mise sur le marché et à l'utilisation de certaines substances et préparations dangereuses et de certains articles dangereux : Inventaire d'Europe : Tous les composants sont répertoriés ou exclus. Surveillance médicale renforcée : Arrêté du 11 Juillet 1977 fixant la liste des travaux nécessitant une surveillance médicale renforcée: non concerné Substances chimiques sur liste noire : Non inscrit Substances chimiques sur liste prioritaire : Non inscrit Liste de la Directive IPPC (Prévention et Réduction Intégrées de la Pollution) - Air : Non inscrit Liste de la Directive IPPC (Prévention et Réduction Intégrées de la Pollution) - Eau : Non inscrit Liste des substances chimiques du tableau I de la Convention sur les armes chimiques : Non inscrit Liste des substances chimiques du tableau II de la Convention sur les armes chimiques : Non inscrit Liste des substances chimiques du tableau III de la Convention sur les armes chimiques : Non inscrit Réglementations Internationales 15.2 Évaluation de la sécurité chimique Ce produit contient des substances nécessitant encore une évaluation du risque chimique : Indique quels renseignements ont été modifiés depuis la version précédente. SECTION 16: Autres informations Abréviations et acronymes : ETA = Estimation de la Toxicité Aiguë CLP = Règlement 1272/2008/CE relatif à la classification, à l'étiquetage et à l'emballage des substances et des mélanges DNEL = Dose dérivée sans effet mention EUH = mention de danger spécifique CLP CPSE = concentration prédite sans effet RRN = Numéro d'enregistrement REACH Classification selon le Règlement (CE) n° 1272/2008 [CLP/SGH] Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 17/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 18/19 SECTION 16: Autres informations Date d'impression 3 Août 2011 Date d'édition/ Date de révision Date de la précédente édition : : : R20/21- Nocif par inhalation et par contact avec la peau. R21/22- Nocif par contact avec la peau et par ingestion. R34- Provoque des brûlures. R41- Risque de lésions oculaires graves. R38- Irritant pour la peau. R36/38- Irritant pour les yeux et la peau. R43- Peut entraîner une sensibilisation par contact avec la peau. R51/53- Toxique pour les organismes aquatiques, peut entraîner des effets néfastes à long terme pour l'environnement aquatique. R52/53- Nocif pour les organismes aquatiques, peut entraîner des effets néfastes à long terme pour l'environnement aquatique. Texte intégral des phrases R : abrégées Texte intégral des classifications [DSD/DPD] : C - Corrosif Xn - Nocif Xi - Irritant N - Dangereux pour l'environnement 3 Août 2011 Aucune validation antérieure. Texte intégral des mentions : H abrégées Procédure employée pour déterminer la classification selon le Règlement (CE) n° 1272/2008 [CLP/SGH] Classification Justification Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Jugement expert Eye Dam. 1, H318 Jugement expert Skin Sens. 1, H317 Jugement expert Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 Jugement expert Texte intégral des classifications [CLP/SGH] : H302 Nocif en cas d'ingestion. H312 Nocif par contact cutané. H314 Provoque des brûlures de la peau et des lésions oculaires graves. H315 Provoque une irritation cutanée. H317 Peut provoquer une allergie cutanée. H318 Provoque des lésions oculaires graves. H319 Provoque une sévère irritation des yeux. H332 Nocif par inhalation. H411 Toxique pour les organismes aquatiques, entraîne des effets néfastes à long terme. Acute Tox. 4, H302 TOXICITÉ AIGUË: ORALE - Catégorie 4 Acute Tox. 4, H312 TOXICITÉ AIGUË: PEAU - Catégorie 4 Acute Tox. 4, H332 TOXICITÉ AIGUË: INHALATION - Catégorie 4 Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 DANGER CHRONIQUE POUR LE MILIEU AQUATIQUE - Catégorie 2 Eye Dam. 1, H318 LÉSIONS OCULAIRES GRAVES/IRRITATION OCULAIRE - Catégorie 1 Eye Irrit. 2, H319 LÉSIONS OCULAIRES GRAVES/IRRITATION OCULAIRE - Catégorie 2 Skin Corr. 1B, H314 CORROSION CUTANÉE/IRRITATION CUTANÉE - Catégorie 1B Skin Irrit. 2, H315 CORROSION CUTANÉE/IRRITATION CUTANÉE - Catégorie 2 Skin Sens. 1, H317 SENSIBILISATION CUTANÉE - Catégorie 1 Skin Irrit. 2, H315 Eye Dam. 1, H318 Skin Sens. 1, H317 Aquatic Chronic 2, H411 N° de FDS. : 00057058 Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 18/19 ARALDITE 2014-1 Conforme au règlement (CE) n° 1907/2006 (REACH), Annexe II - France Date d'impression : Date d'édition : 3 Août 2011 3 Août 2011 N° de FDS. Version : : 00057058 1 19/19 SECTION 16: Autres informations Version Avis au lecteur : 1 Les informations et recommandations figurant dans cette publication sont fondées sur notre expérience générale et sont fournies de bonne foi au mieux de nos connaissances actuelles, MAIS RIEN DANS LES PRESENTES NE DOIT ÊTRE INTERPRETE COMME CONSTITUANT UNE GARANTIE OU UNE DECLARATION, EXPRESSE, IMPLICITE OU AUTRE. DANS TOUS LES CAS, IL INCOMBE A L'UTILISATEUR DE DETERMINER ET DE VERIFIER L'EXACTITUDE, AINSI QUE LE CARACTERE SUFFISANT ET APPLICABLE DE TELLES INFORMATIONS ET RECOMMANDATIONS, DE MEME QUE L'ADEQUATION ET L'ADAPTATION D'UN QUELCONQUE PRODUIT A UNE UTILISATION SPECIFIQUE OU DANS UN BUT PARTICULIER. LES PRODUITS MENTIONNES PEUVENT PRESENTER DES RISQUES INCONNUS ET DOIVENT ETRE UTILISES AVEC PRECAUTION. MEME SI CERTAINS RISQUES SONT DECRITS DANS CETTE PUBLICATION, IL N'EXISTE AUCUNE GARANTIE QU'IL S'AGIT DES SEULS RISQUES EXISTANTS. Les risques, la toxicité et le comportement des produits peuvent différer lorsque ceux-ci sont utilisés avec d'autres matériaux et dépendent des conditions de fabrication et d'autres processus. Ces risques, cette toxicité et ces comportements doivent être déterminés par l'utilisateur et portés à la connaissance des personnes ou entités chargés du transport ou de la manutention, du traitement ou de la transformation, ainsi que de tous utilisateurs finaux. ARALDITE® est une marque déposée de Huntsman Corporation ou une filiale dans un ou plusieurs pays, mais pas dans tous les pays. AUCUNE PERSONNE OU ORGANISATION A L’EXCEPTION D'UN EMPLOYE HUNTSMAN DUMENT QUALIFIE EST AUTORISE A FOURNIR OU METTRE A DISPOSITION DES FICHES DE DONNEES DE SECURITE POUR LES PRODUITS HUNTSMAN. LES FICHES DE DONNEES DE SECURITE DE SOURCES NON AUTORISEE PEUVENT CONTENIR DES INFORMATIONS QUI NE SONT PLUS A JOUR OU INEXACTES. AUCUNE PARTIE DE CETTE FICHE NE PEUT ETRE REPRODUITE OU DIFFUSEE SOUS QUELQUE FORME QUE CE SOIT, OU PAR TOUT MOYEN, SANS L'ACCORD ECRIT DE HUNTSMAN. TOUTES LES DEMANDES D'AUTORISATION DE REPRODUCTION DES DONNEES DE CE FEUILLET DOIVENT ETRE ADRESSEES A HUNTSMAN, AU RESPONSABLE DE LA SECURITE DU PRODUIT A L’ADRESSE CI-DESSUS. Date d'édition / Date de révision : 3 Août 2011 19/19 http://www.farnell.com/datasheets/1442064.pdf 1. Product profile 1.1 General description Logic level N-channel MOSFET in LFPAK package qualified to 175 °C. This product is designed and qualified for use in a wide range of industrial, communications and domestic equipment. 1.2 Features and benefits  Advanced TrenchMOS provides low RDSon and low gate charge  High efficiency gains in switching power convertors  Improved mechanical and thermal characteristics  LFPAK provides maximum power density in a Power SO8 package 1.3 Applications  DC-to-DC converters  Lithium-ion battery protection  Load switching  Motor control  Server power supplies 1.4 Quick reference data PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 Product data sheet LFPAK Table 1. Quick reference data Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit VDS drain-source voltage Tj ≥ 25 °C; Tj ≤ 175 °C - - 30 V ID drain current Tmb = 25 °C; VGS = 10 V; see Figure 1 [1] - - 100 A Ptot total power dissipation Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 2 - - 109 W Tj junction temperature -55 - 175 °C Static characteristics RDSon drain-source on-state resistance VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 100 °C; see Figure 13 - - 2.4 mΩ VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 25 °C - 1.3 1.7 mΩ Dynamic characteristics QGD gate-drain charge VGS = 4.5 V; ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 8.7 - nCPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 2 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK [1] Continuous current is limited by package. 2. Pinning information 3. Ordering information QG(tot) total gate charge VGS = 4.5 V; ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; see Figure 14 - 36.2 - nC Avalanche ruggedness EDS(AL)S non-repetitive drain-source avalanche energy VGS = 10 V; Tj(init) = 25 °C; ID = 100 A; Vsup ≤ 30 V; RGS = 50 Ω; unclamped - - 241 mJ Table 1. Quick reference data …continued Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Table 2. Pinning information Pin Symbol Description Simplified outline Graphic symbol 1 S source SOT669 (LFPAK; Power-SO8) 2 S source 3 S source 4 G gate mb D mounting base; connected to drain mb 1234 S D G mbb076 Table 3. Ordering information Type number Package Name Description Version PSMN1R7-30YL LFPAK; Power-SO8 plastic single-ended surface-mounted package; 4 leads SOT669PSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 3 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 4. Limiting values [1] Continuous current is limited by package. Table 4. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit VDS drain-source voltage Tj ≥ 25 °C; Tj ≤ 175 °C - 30 V VDSM peak drain-source voltage tp ≤ 25 ns; f ≤ 500 kHz; EDS(AL) ≤ 360 nJ; pulsed - 35 V VDGR drain-gate voltage Tj ≥ 25 °C; Tj ≤ 175 °C; RGS = 20 kΩ - 30 V VGS gate-source voltage -20 20 V ID drain current VGS = 10 V; Tmb = 100 °C; see Figure 1 [1] - 100 A VGS = 10 V; Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 1 [1] - 100 A IDM peak drain current pulsed; tp ≤ 10 µs; Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 3 - 790 A Ptot total power dissipation Tmb = 25 °C; see Figure 2 - 109 W Tstg storage temperature -55 175 °C Tj junction temperature -55 175 °C Source-drain diode IS source current Tmb = 25 °C [1] - 100 A ISM peak source current pulsed; tp ≤ 10 µs; Tmb = 25 °C - 790 A Avalanche ruggedness EDS(AL)S non-repetitive drain-source avalanche energy VGS = 10 V; Tj(init) = 25 °C; ID = 100 A; Vsup ≤ 30 V; RGS = 50 Ω; unclamped - 241 mJ Fig 1. Continuous drain current as a function of mounting base temperature Fig 2. Normalized total power dissipation as a function of mounting base temperature 003aac446 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 0 50 100 150 200 Tmb (°C) ID (A) (1) Tmb (°C) 0 200 50 100 150 03aa16 40 80 120 Pder (%) 0PSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 4 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 3. Safe operating area; continuous and peak drain currents as a function of drain-source voltage 003aad111 1 10 102 103 104 10-1 1 10 102 VDS (V) ID (A) Limit RDSon = VDS / ID (1) DC 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms 100 μs 10 μsPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 5 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 5. Thermal characteristics Table 5. Thermal characteristics Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Rth(j-mb) thermal resistance from junction to mounting base see Figure 4 - 0.5 1.1 K/W Fig 4. Transient thermal impedance from junction to mounting base as a function of pulse duration 003aac456 single shot 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 10-3 10-2 10-1 1 10 10-6 10-5 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 1 tp (s) Zth(j-mb) (K/W) δ = 0.5 tp T P t tp T δ =PSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 6 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 6. Characteristics Table 6. Characteristics Tested to JEDEC standards where applicable. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Static characteristics V(BR)DSS drain-source breakdown voltage ID = 250 µA; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C 30 - - V ID = 250 µA; VGS = 0 V; Tj = -55 °C 27 - - V VGS(th) gate-source threshold voltage ID = 1 mA; VDS = VGS; Tj = 25 °C; see Figure 11; see Figure 12 1.3 1.7 2.15 V ID = 1 mA; VDS = VGS; Tj = 150 °C; see Figure 12 0.65 - - V ID = 1 mA; VDS = VGS; Tj = -55 °C; see Figure 12 - - 2.45 V IDSS drain leakage current VDS = 30 V; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C - - 1 µA VDS = 30 V; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 150 °C - - 100 µA IGSS gate leakage current VGS = 16 V; VDS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C - - 100 nA VGS = -16 V; VDS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C - - 100 nA RDSon drain-source on-state resistance VGS = 4.5 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 25 °C - 1.8 2.1 mΩ VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 150 °C; see Figure 13 - - 2.8 mΩ VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 100 °C; see Figure 13 - - 2.4 mΩ VGS = 10 V; ID = 15 A; Tj = 25 °C - 1.3 1.7 mΩ RG gate resistance f = 1 MHz - 0.77 1.5 Ω Dynamic characteristics QG(tot) total gate charge ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; VGS = 10 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 77.9 - nC ID = 0 A; VDS = 0 V; VGS = 10 V - 70 - nC ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; VGS = 4.5 V; see Figure 14 - 36.2 - nC QGS gate-source charge ID = 10 A; VDS = 12 V; VGS = 4.5 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 11.6 - nC QGS(th) pre-threshold gate-source charge - 8 - nC QGS(th-pl) post-threshold gate-source charge - 3.6 - nC QGD gate-drain charge - 8.7 - nC VGS(pl) gate-source plateau voltage VDS = 12 V; see Figure 14; see Figure 15 - 2.34 - V Ciss input capacitance VDS = 12 V; VGS = 0 V; f = 1 MHz; Tj = 25 °C; see Figure 16 - 5057 - pF Coss output capacitance - 1082 - pF Crss reverse transfer capacitance - 398 - pF td(on) turn-on delay time VDS = 12 V; RL = 0.5 Ω; VGS = 4.5 V; RG(ext) = 4.7 Ω - 46 - ns tr rise time - 72 - ns td(off) turn-off delay time - 76 - ns tf fall time - 34 - nsPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 7 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Source-drain diode VSD source-drain voltage IS = 25 A; VGS = 0 V; Tj = 25 °C; see Figure 17 - 0.78 1.2 V trr reverse recovery time IS = 20 A; dIS/dt = -100 A/µs; VGS = 0 V; VDS = 20 V - 45 - ns Qr recovered charge - 56 - nC Table 6. Characteristics …continued Tested to JEDEC standards where applicable. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Fig 5. Output characteristics: drain current as a function of drain-source voltage; typical values Fig 6. Drain-source on-state resistance as a function of drain current; typical values Fig 7. Forward transconductance as a function of drain current; typical values Fig 8. Input and reverse transfer capacitances as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values 003aac449 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 2 4 6 8 10 VDS (V) ID (A) 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 VGS (V) = 3.2 3.4 3.6 4 10 003aac450 1 2 3 4 5 0 50 100 150 200 250 ID (A) RDSon (mΩ) 7 10 4 3.6 VGS (V) = 3.4 003aac452 0 50 100 150 200 0 20 40 60 80 ID (A) gfs (S) 003aac455 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 2 4 6 810 VGS (V) C (pF) Ciss CrssPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 8 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 9. Drain-source on-state resistance as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values Fig 10. Transfer characteristics: drain current as a function of gate-source voltage; typical values Fig 11. Sub-threshold drain current as a function of gate-source voltage Fig 12. Gate-source threshold voltage as a function of junction temperature 003aac451 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 2 4 6 8 10 VGS (V) RDSon (mΩ) 003aac453 0 20 40 60 80 01234 VGS (V) ID (A) Tj = 150 °C 25 °C 003aab271 10-6 10-5 10-4 10-3 10-2 10-1 0123 VGS (V) ID (A) min typ max 003aac982 0 1 2 3 -60 0 60 120 180 Tj (°C) VGS(th) (V) max typ minPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 9 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 13. Normalized drain-source on-state resistance factor as a function of junction temperature Fig 14. Gate charge waveform definitions Fig 15. Gate-source voltage as a function of gate charge; typical values Fig 16. Input, output and reverse transfer capacitances as a function of drain-source voltage; typical values 03aa27 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 −60 0 60 120 180 Tj (°C) a 003aaa508 VGS VGS(th) QGS1 QGS2 QGD VDS QG(tot) ID QGS VGS(pl) 003aac448 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 20 40 60 80 QG (nC) VGS (V) VDS = 19 (V) VDS = 12 (V) 003aac454 0 2000 4000 6000 10-1 1 10 102 VDS (V) C (pF) Ciss Coss CrssPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 10 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Fig 17. Source (diode forward) current as a function of source-drain (diode forward) voltage; typical values 003aac447 0 20 40 60 80 100 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 VSD (V) IS (A) Tj = 150 °C 25 °CPSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 11 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 7. Package outline Fig 18. Package outline SOT669 (LFPAK; Power-SO8) REFERENCES OUTLINE VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA SOT669 MO-235 06-03-16 11-03-25 0 2.5 5 mm scale e E1 b c2 A2 UNIT A A2 b c e DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) mm 1.10 0.95 A1 A3 0.15 0.00 1.20 1.01 0.50 0.35 b2 4.41 3.62 b3 2.2 2.0 b4 0.9 0.7 0.25 0.19 c2 0.30 0.24 4.10 3.80 6.2 5.8 H 1.3 0.8 L2 0.85 0.40 L 1.3 0.8 L1 8° 0° D w y (1) 5.0 4.8 E(1) 3.3 3.1 E1 D1 (1) (1) max 0.25 4.20 1.27 0.25 0.1 1 2 34 mounting base D1 c Plastic single-ended surface-mounted package (LFPAK; Power-SO8); 4 leads SOT669 E b2 b3 b4 H D L2 L1 A w M A C C X 1/2 e y C θ θ (A )3 L A A1 detail X Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm maximum per side are not included. PSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 12 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 8. Revision history Table 7. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes PSMN1R7-30YL v.5 20110530 Product data sheet - PSMN1R7-30YL v.4 Modifications: • Various changes to content. PSMN1R7-30YL v.4 20100420 Product data sheet - PSMN1R7-30YL v.3PSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 13 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK 9. Legal information 9.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term 'short data sheet' is explained in section "Definitions". [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 9.2 Definitions Preview — The document is a preview version only. The document is still subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however, shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the Product data sheet. 9.3 Disclaimers Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory. Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their applications and products. NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device. Document status [1] [2] Product status [3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. PSMN1R7-30YL All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 1 — 30 May 2011 14 of 15 NXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. Non-automotive qualified products — Unless this data sheet expressly states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified, the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications. In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer (a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b) whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ standard warranty and NXP Semiconductors’ product specifications. 9.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Adelante, Bitport, Bitsound, CoolFlux, CoReUse, DESFire, EZ-HV, FabKey, GreenChip, HiPerSmart, HITAG, I²C-bus logo, ICODE, I-CODE, ITEC, Labelution, MIFARE, MIFARE Plus, MIFARE Ultralight, MoReUse, QLPAK, Silicon Tuner, SiliconMAX, SmartXA, STARplug, TOPFET, TrenchMOS, TriMedia and UCODE — are trademarks of NXP B.V. HD Radio and HD Radio logo — are trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. 10. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.comNXP Semiconductors PSMN1R7-30YL N-channel 30 V 1.7 mΩ logic level MOSFET in LFPAK © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 30 May 2011 Document identifier: PSMN1R7-30YL Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s) described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’. 11. Contents 1 Product profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1.2 Features and benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1.3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1.4 Quick reference data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 5 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 7 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 8 Revision history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 9 Legal information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9.2 Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 9.4 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 10 Contact information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 Product data sheet 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 2 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 3. Ordering information 4. Functional diagram Table 1. Ordering information Type number Package Temperature range Name Description Version 74VHC126D -40 °C to +125 °C SO14 plastic small outline package; 14 leads; body width 3.9 mm SOT108-1 74VHCT126D 74VHC126PW -40 °C to +125 °C TSSOP14 plastic thin shrink small outline package; 14 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT402-1 74VHCT126PW 74VHC126BQ -40 °C to +125 °C DHVQFN14 plastic dual in-line compatible thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads; 14 terminals; body 2.5 ´ 3 ´ 0.85 mm SOT762-1 74VHCT126BQ Fig 1. Functional diagram mna235 2 1A 1Y 1 3 1OE 5 2A 2Y 4 6 2OE 9 3A 3Y 10 8 3OE 12 4A 4Y 13 11 4OE Fig 2. Logic symbol Fig 3. IEC logic symbol mna234 nOE nA nY mna236 1 EN1 1 3 2 4 6 5 10 8 9 13 11 12 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 3 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 5. Pinning information 5.1 Pinning 5.2 Pin description (1) The die substrate is attached to this pad using conductive die attach material. It can not be used as a supply pin or input. Fig 4. Pin configuration SO14 and TSSOP14 Fig 5. Pin configuration DHVQFN14 74VHC126 74VHCT126 1OE VCC 1A 4OE 1Y 4A 2OE 4Y 2A 3OE 2Y 3A GND 3Y 001aak056 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 12 11 14 13 001aak076 74VHC126 74VHCT126 Transparent top view 2Y 3A 2A 3OE 2OE 4Y 1Y 4A 1A 4OE GND 3Y 1OE VCC 6 9 5 10 4 11 3 12 2 13 7 8 1 14 terminal 1 index area GND(1) Table 2. Pin description Symbol Pin Description 1OE 1 output enable input 1 (active HIGH) 1A 2 data input 1 1Y 3 data output 1 2OE 4 output enable input 2 (active HIGH) 2A 5 data input 2 2Y 6 data output 2 GND 7 ground (0 V) 3Y 8 data output 3 3A 9 data input 3 3OE 10 output enable input 3 (active HIGH) 4Y 11 data output 4 4A 12 data input 4 4OE 13 output enable input 4 (active HIGH) VCC 14 supply voltage 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 4 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 6. Functional description [1] H = HIGH voltage state; L = LOW voltage state; X = don’t care; Z = high-impedance OFF-state. 7. Limiting values [1] The input and output voltage ratings may be exceeded if the input and output current ratings are observed. [2] For SO14 packages: above 70 °C the value of Ptot derates linearly at 8 mW/K. For TSSOP14 packages: above 60 °C the value of Ptot derates linearly at 5.5 mW/K. For DHVQFN14 packages: above 60 °C the value of Ptot derates linearly at 4.5 mW/K. Table 3. Function table[1] Control Input Output nOE nA nY H L L H H H L X Z Table 4. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Voltages are referenced to GND (ground = 0 V). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit VCC supply voltage -0.5 +7.0 V VI input voltage -0.5 +7.0 V IIK input clamping current VI < -0.5 V [1] -20 - mA IOK output clamping current VO < -0.5 V or VO > VCC + 0.5 V [1] -20 +20 mA IO output current VO = -0.5 V to (VCC + 0.5 V) -25 +25 mA ICC supply current - +75 mA IGND ground current -75 - mA Tstg storage temperature -65 +150 °C Ptot total power dissipation Tamb = -40 °C to +125 °C [2] - 500 mW 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 5 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 8. Recommended operating conditions 9. Static characteristics Table 5. Operating conditions Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit 74VHC126 VCC supply voltage 2.0 5.0 5.5 V VI input voltage 0 - 5.5 V VO output voltage 0 - VCC V Tamb ambient temperature -40 +25 +125 °C Dt/DV input transition rise and fall rate VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V - - 100 ns/V VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V - - 20 ns/V 74VHCT126 VCC supply voltage 4.5 5.0 5.5 V VI input voltage 0 - 5.5 V VO output voltage 0 - VCC V Tamb ambient temperature -40 +25 +125 °C Dt/DV input transition rise and fall rate VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V - - 20 ns/V Table 6. Static characteristics At recommended operating conditions; voltages are referenced to GND (ground = 0 V). Symbol Parameter Conditions 25 °C -40 °C to +85 °C -40 °C to +125 °C Unit Min Typ Max Min Max Min Max 74VHC126 VIH HIGH-level input voltage VCC = 2.0 V 1.5 - - 1.5 - 1.5 - V VCC = 3.0 V 2.1 - - 2.1 - 2.1 - V VCC = 5.5 V 3.85 - - 3.85 - 3.85 - V VIL LOW-level input voltage VCC = 2.0 V - - 0.5 - 0.5 - 0.5 V VCC = 3.0 V - - 0.9 - 0.9 - 0.9 V VCC = 5.5 V - - 1.65 - 1.65 - 1.65 V VOH HIGH-level output voltage VI = VIH or VIL IO = -50 mA; VCC = 2.0 V 1.9 2.0 - 1.9 - 1.9 - V IO = -50 mA; VCC = 3.0 V 2.9 3.0 - 2.9 - 2.9 - V IO = -50 mA; VCC = 4.5 V 4.4 4.5 - 4.4 - 4.4 - V IO = -4.0 mA; VCC = 3.0 V 2.58 - - 2.48 - 2.40 - V IO = -8.0 mA; VCC = 4.5 V 3.94 - - 3.80 - 3.70 - V VOL LOW-level output voltage VI = VIH or VIL IO = 50 mA; VCC = 2.0 V - 0 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1 V IO = 50 mA; VCC = 3.0 V - 0 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1 V IO = 50 mA; VCC = 4.5 V - 0 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1 V IO = 4.0 mA; VCC = 3.0 V - - 0.36 - 0.44 - 0.55 V IO = 8.0 mA; VCC = 4.5 V - - 0.36 - 0.44 - 0.55 V 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 6 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state II input leakage current VI = 5.5 V or GND; VCC = 0 V to 5.5 V - - 0.1 - 1.0 - 2.0 mA IOZ OFF-state output current VI = VIH or VIL; VO = VCC or GND; VCC = 5.5 V - - ±0.25 - ±2.5 - ±10.0 mA ICC supply current VI = VCC or GND; IO = 0 A; VCC = 5.5 V - - 2.0 - 20 - 40 mA CI input capacitance VI = VCC or GND - 3 10 - 10 - 10 pF CO output capacitance - 4 - - - - - pF 74VHCT126 VIH HIGH-level input voltage VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V 2.0 - - 2.0 - 2.0 - V VIL LOW-level input voltage VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V - - 0.8 - 0.8 - 0.8 V VOH HIGH-level output voltage VI = VIH or VIL; VCC = 4.5 V IO = -50 mA 4.4 4.5 - 4.4 - 4.4 - V IO = -8.0 mA 3.94 - - 3.80 - 3.70 - V VOL LOW-level output voltage VI = VIH or VIL; VCC = 4.5 V IO = 50 mA - 0 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1 V IO = 8.0 mA - - 0.36 - 0.44 - 0.55 V II input leakage current VI = 5.5 V or GND; VCC = 0 V to 5.5 V - - 0.1 - 1.0 - 2.0 mA IOZ OFF-state output current VI = VIH or VIL; VO = VCC or GND per input pin; other inputs at VCC or GND; IO = 0 A; VCC = 5.5 V - - ±0.25 - ±2.5 - ±10.0 mA ICC supply current VI = VCC or GND; IO = 0 A; VCC = 5.5 V - - 2.0 - 20 - 40 mA DICC additional supply current per input pin; VI = VCC - 2.1 V; other pins at VCC or GND; IO = 0 A; VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V - - 1.35 - 1.5 - 1.5 mA CI input capacitance VI = VCC or GND - 3 10 - 10 - 10 pF CO output capacitance - 4 - - - - - pF Table 6. Static characteristics …continued At recommended operating conditions; voltages are referenced to GND (ground = 0 V). Symbol Parameter Conditions 25 °C -40 °C to +85 °C -40 °C to +125 °C Unit Min Typ Max Min Max Min Max 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 7 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 10. Dynamic characteristics Table 7. Dynamic characteristics Voltages are referenced to GND (ground = 0 V); for test circuit see Figure 8. Symbol Parameter Conditions 25 °C -40 °C to +85 °C -40 °C to +125 °C Unit Min Typ[1] Max Min Max Min Max 74VHC126 tpd propagation delay nA to nY; see Figure 6 [2] VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V CL = 15 pF - 4.7 8.0 1.0 9.5 1.0 10.0 ns CL = 50 pF - 6.7 11.5 1.0 13.0 1.0 14.5 ns VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V CL = 15 pF - 3.3 5.5 1.0 6.5 1.0 7.0 ns CL = 50 pF - 4.7 7.5 1.0 8.5 1.0 9.5 ns ten enable time nOE to nY; see Figure 7 [3] VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V CL = 15 pF - 5.3 8.0 1.0 9.5 1.0 10.0 ns CL = 50 pF - 7.6 11.5 1.0 13.0 1.0 14.5 ns VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V CL = 15 pF - 3.6 5.3 1.0 6.1 1.0 7.0 ns CL = 50 pF - 5.1 7.6 1.0 8.7 1.0 9.5 ns tdis disable time nOE to nY; see Figure 7 [4] VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V CL = 15 pF - 6.6 9.7 1.0 11.5 1.0 12.5 ns CL = 50 pF - 9.4 13.2 1.0 15.0 1.0 16.5 ns VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V CL = 15 pF - 4.7 6.8 1.0 8.0 1.0 8.5 ns CL = 50 pF - 6.7 8.8 1.0 10.0 1.0 11.0 ns CPD power dissipation capacitance fi = 1 MHz; VI = GND to VCC [5] - 10 - - - - - pF 74VHCT126; VCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V tpd propagation delay nA to nY; see Figure 6 [2] CL = 15 pF - 3.0 5.5 1.0 6.5 1.0 7.0 ns CL = 50 pF - 4.3 7.5 1.0 8.5 1.0 9.5 ns ten enable time nOE to nY; see Figure 7 [3] CL = 15 pF - 3.3 5.1 1.0 6.0 1.0 6.5 ns CL = 50 pF - 4.7 7.1 1.0 8.0 1.0 9.0 ns tdis disable time nOE to nY; see Figure 7 [4] CL = 15 pF - 4.8 6.8 1.0 8.0 1.0 8.5 ns CL = 50 pF - 6.9 8.9 1.0 10.0 1.0 11.5 ns CPD power dissipation capacitance fi = 1 MHz; VI = GND to VCC [5] - 12 - - - - - pF 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 8 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state [1] Typical values are measured at nominal supply voltage (VCC = 3.3 V and VCC = 5.0 V). [2] tpd is the same as tPLH and tPHL. [3] ten is the same as tPZL and tPZH. [4] tdis is the same as tPLZ and tPHZ. [5] CPD is used to determine the dynamic power dissipation (PD in mW). PD = CPD ´ VCC 2 ´ fi ´ N + S(CL ´ VCC 2 ´ fo) where: fi = input frequency in MHz; fo = output frequency in MHz; CL = output load capacitance in pF; VCC = supply voltage in V; N = number of inputs switching; S(CL ´ VCC 2 ´ fo) = sum of the outputs. 11. Waveforms Measurement points are given in Table 8. VOL and VOH are typical voltage output levels that occur with the output load. Fig 6. Input to output propagation delays mna237 tPHL tPLH VM nA input VM nY output GND VI VOH VOL Measurement points are given in Table 8. VOL and VOH are typical voltage output levels that occur with the output load. Fig 7. Enable and disable times mna949 tPLZ tPHZ outputs disabled outputs enabled VY VX outputs enabled output LOW-to-OFF OFF-to-LOW output HIGH-to-OFF OFF-to-HIGH nOE input VOL VOH VCC VI VM GND GND tPZL tPZH VM VM 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 9 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state Table 8. Measurement points Type Input Output VM VM VX VY 74VHC126 0.5VCC 0.5VCC VOL + 0.3 V VOH - 0.3 V 74VHCT126 1.5 V 0.5VCC VOL + 0.3 V VOH - 0.3 V Test data is given in Table 9. Definitions test circuit: RT = termination resistance should be equal to output impedance Zo of the pulse generator. CL = load capacitance including jig and probe capacitance. RL = load resistance. S1 = test selection switch. Fig 8. Test circuitry for measuring switching times VM VM tW tW 10 % 90 % 0 V VI VI negative pulse positive pulse 0 V VM VM 90 % 10 % tf tr tr tf 001aad983 DUT VCC VCC VI VO RT RL S1 CL G open Table 9. Test data Type Input Load S1 position VI tr, tf CL RL tPHL, tPLH tPZH, tPHZ tPZL, tPLZ 74VHC126 VCC £ 3.0 ns 15 pF, 50 pF 1 kW open GND VCC 74VHCT126 3.0 V £ 3.0 ns 15 pF, 50 pF 1 kW open GND VCC 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 10 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 12. Package outline Fig 9. Package outline SOT108-1 (SO14) UNIT A max. A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E(1) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) q OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm inches 1.75 0.25 0.10 1.45 1.25 0.25 0.49 0.36 0.25 0.19 8.75 8.55 4.0 3.8 1.27 6.2 5.8 0.7 0.6 0.7 0.3 8 0 o o 0.25 0.1 DIMENSIONS (inch dimensions are derived from the original mm dimensions) Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm (0.006 inch) maximum per side are not included. 1.0 0.4 SOT108-1 X w M q A A 1 A2 bp D HE Lp Q detail X E Z e c L v M A (A 3 ) A 7 8 1 14 y 076E06 MS-012 pin 1 index 0.069 0.010 0.004 0.057 0.049 0.01 0.019 0.014 0.0100 0.0075 0.35 0.34 0.16 0.15 0.05 1.05 0.041 0.244 0.228 0.028 0.024 0.028 0.012 0.01 0.25 0.01 0.004 0.039 0.016 99-12-27 03-02-19 0 2.5 5 mm scale SO14: plastic small outline package; 14 leads; body width 3.9 mm SOT108-1 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 11 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state Fig 10. Package outline SOT402-1 (TSSOP14) UNIT A1 A2 A3 bp c D(1) E (2) e HE L Lp Q v w y Z (1) q OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm 0.15 0.05 0.95 0.80 0.30 0.19 0.2 0.1 5.1 4.9 4.5 4.3 0.65 6.6 6.2 0.4 0.3 0.72 0.38 8 0 o 1 0.2 0.13 0.1 o DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) Notes 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.15 mm maximum per side are not included. 2. Plastic interlead protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included. 0.75 0.50 SOT402-1 MO-153 99-12-27 03-02-18 w M bp D Z e 0.25 1 7 14 8 q A A1 A2 Lp Q detail X L (A 3 ) HE E c v M A X A y 0 2.5 5 mm scale TSSOP14: plastic thin shrink small outline package; 14 leads; body width 4.4 mm SOT402-1 A max. 1.1 pin 1 index 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 12 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state Fig 11. Package outline SOT762-1 (DHVQFN14) terminal 1 index area 1 0.5 UNIT A1 b Eh e y 0.2 c OUTLINE REFERENCES VERSION EUROPEAN PROJECTION ISSUE DATE IEC JEDEC JEITA mm 3.1 2.9 Dh 1.65 1.35 y1 2.6 2.4 1.15 0.85 e1 2 0.30 0.18 0.05 0.00 0.05 0.1 DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions) SOT762-1 - - - MO-241 - - - 0.5 0.3 L 0.1 v 0.05 w 0 2.5 5 mm scale SOT762-1 DHVQFN14: plastic dual in-line compatible thermal enhanced very thin quad flat package; no leads; 14 terminals; body 2.5 x 3 x 0.85 mm A(1) max. A A1 c detail X e y1 C y L Eh Dh e e1 b 2 6 13 9 8 1 7 14 X D E C B A 02-10-17 03-01-27 terminal 1 index area C A C v M B w M E(1) Note 1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.075 mm maximum per side are not included. D(1) 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 13 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 13. Abbreviations 14. Revision history Table 10. Abbreviations Acronym Description CDM Charged Device Model CMOS Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor DUT Device Under Test ESD ElectroStatic Discharge HBM Human Body Model LSTTL Low-power Schottky Transistor-Transistor Logic MM Machine Model Table 11. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes 74VHC_VHCT126_1 20090813 Product data sheet - - 74VHC_VHCT126_1 © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 01 — 13 August 2009 14 of 15 NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state 15. Legal information 15.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”. [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 15.2 Definitions Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. 15.3 Disclaimers General — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in medical, military, aircraft, space or life support equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) may cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of this document is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability. Terms and conditions of sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, including those pertaining to warranty, intellectual property rights infringement and limitation of liability, unless explicitly otherwise agreed to in writing by NXP Semiconductors. In case of any inconsistency or conflict between information in this document and such terms and conditions, the latter will prevail. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. 15.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 16. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. NXP Semiconductors 74VHC126; 74VHCT126 Quad buffer/line driver; 3-state © NXP B.V. 2009. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 13 August 2009 Document identifier: 74VHC_VHCT126_1 Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s) described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’. Product specification July 1998 DISCRETE SEMICONDUCTORS BYV79E series Rectifier diodes ultrafast, rugged  Semiconductors Product specification Rectifier diodes BYV79E series ultrafast, rugged FEATURES SYMBOL QUICK REFERENCE DATA • Low forward volt drop VR = 150 V/ 200 V • Fast switching • Soft recovery characteristic VF ≤ 0.9 V • Reverse surge capability • High thermal cycling performance IF(AV) = 14 A • Low thermal resistance IRRM ≤ 0.2 A trr ≤ 30 ns GENERAL DESCRIPTION PINNING SOD59 (TO220AC) Ultra-fast, epitaxial rectifier diodes PIN DESCRIPTION intended for use as output rectifiers in high frequency switched mode 1 cathode power supplies. 2 anode The BYV79E series is supplied in the conventional leaded SOD59 tab cathode (TO220AC) package. LIMITING VALUES Limiting values in accordance with the Absolute Maximum System (IEC 134). SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. MAX. UNIT BYV79E -150 -200 VRRM Peak repetitive reverse voltage - 150 200 V VRWM Crest working reverse voltage - 150 200 V VR Continuous reverse voltage Tmb ≤ 145˚C - 150 200 V IF(AV) Average forward current1 square wave - 14 A δ = 0.5; Tmb ≤ 120 ˚C IFRM Repetitive peak forward current t = 25 μs; δ = 0.5; - 28 A Tmb ≤ 120 ˚C IFSM Non-repetitive peak forward t = 10 ms - 150 A current t = 8.3 ms - 160 A sinusoidal; with reapplied VRWM(max) IRRM Repetitive peak reverse current tp = 2 μs; δ = 0.001 - 0.2 A IRSM Non-repetitive peak reverse tp = 100 μs - 0.2 A current Tstg Storage temperature -40 150 ˚C Tj Operating junction temperature - 150 ˚C 1. Neglecting switching and reverse current losses. ESD LIMITING VALUE SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. MAX. UNIT VC Electrostatic discharge Human body model; - 8 kV capacitor voltage C = 250 pF; R = 1.5 kΩ k a 1 2 1 tab 2 July 1998 1 Rev 1.200  Semiconductors Product specification Rectifier diodes BYV79E series ultrafast, rugged THERMAL RESISTANCES SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNIT Rth j-mb Thermal resistance junction to - - 2 K/W mounting base Rth j-a Thermal resistance junction to in free air - 60 - K/W ambient STATIC CHARACTERISTICS Tj = 25 ˚C unless otherwise stated SYMBOL PARAMETER CONDITIONS MIN. TYP. MAX. UNIT VF Forward voltage IF = 14 A; Tj = 150˚C - 0.83 0.90 V IF = 14 A - 0.95 1.05 V IF = 50 A - 1.2 1.4 V IR Reverse current VR = VRWM; Tj = 100 ˚C - 0.5 1.3 mA VR = VRWM - 5 50 μA Qs Reverse recovery charge IF = 2 A; VR ≥ 30 V; -dIF/dt = 20 A/μs - 6 15 nC trr1 Reverse recovery time IF = 1 A; VR ≥ 30 V; - 20 30 ns -dIF/dt = 100 A/μs trr2 Reverse recovery time IF = 0.5 A to IR = 1 A; Irec = 0.25 A - 13 22 ns Vfr Forward recovery voltage IF = 1 A; dIF/dt = 10 A/μs - 1 - V July 1998 2 Rev 1.200  Semiconductors Product specification Rectifier diodes BYV79E series ultrafast, rugged Fig.1. Definition of trr1, Qs and Irrm Fig.2. Definition of Vfr Fig.3. Circuit schematic for trr2 Fig.4. Definition of trr2 Fig.5. Maximum forward dissipation PF = f(IF(AV)); square current waveform where IF(AV) =IF(RMS) x √D. Fig.6. Maximum forward dissipation PF = f(IF(AV)); sinusoidal current waveform where a = form factor = IF(RMS) / IF(AV). Q s 10% 100% time dI dt F I R I F I rrm t rr I = 1A R I rec = 0.25A 0A trr2 0.5A IF IR time time V F V fr V F I F 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 0.5 0.2 0.1 BYV79 IF(AV) / A PF / W D = 1.0 Tmb(max) / C 150 140 130 120 110 Vo = 0.744 V Rs = 0.0112 Ohms tp D = tp T T t I shunt Current to ’scope D.U.T. Voltage Pulse Source R 0 5 10 15 0 5 10 15 1.9 2.2 2.8 4 BYV79 IF(AV) / A PF / W Tmb(max) / C 150 140 130 a = 1.57 120 Vo = 0.744 V Rs = 0.0112 Ohms July 1998 3 Rev 1.200  Semiconductors Product specification Rectifier diodes BYV79E series ultrafast, rugged Fig.7. Maximum trr at Tj = 25 ˚C. Fig.8. Maximum Irrm at Tj = 25 ˚C. Fig.9. Typical and maximum forward characteristic IF = f(VF); parameter Tj Fig.10. Maximum Qs at Tj = 25 ˚C. Fig.11. Transient thermal impedance; Zth j-mb = f(tp). 1 10 trr / ns 1 10 100 1000 dIF/dt (A/us) IF=1A IF=10A 100 1.0 10 100 Qs / nC 1.0 10 100 -dIF/dt (A/us) 1000 IF=10A 5A 2A 10 1 0.1 0.01 Irrm / A 1 10 100 -dIF/dt (A/us) IF=10A IF=2A 1us 10us 100us 1ms 10ms 100ms 1s 10s 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 pulse width, tp (s) BYV79E Transient thermal impedance, Zth j-mb (K/W) tp D = tp T T P t D 0 2 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 max typ Tj = 150 C Tj = 25 C 0.5 1.0 IF / A VF / V 1.5 July 1998 4 Rev 1.200  Semiconductors Product specification Rectifier diodes BYV79E series ultrafast, rugged MECHANICAL DATA Dimensions in mm Net Mass: 2 g Fig.12. SOD59 (TO220AC). pin 1 connected to mounting base. Notes 1. Refer to mounting instructions for TO220 envelopes. 2. Epoxy meets UL94 V0 at 1/8". 10,3 max 3,7 2,8 3,0 3,0 max not tinned 1,3 max (2x) 2,4 0,6 4,5 max 5,9 min 15,8 max 1,3 0,9 max (2x) 13,5 min 5,08 1 2 July 1998 5 Rev 1.200 NXP Semiconductors Legal information DATA SHEET STATUS Notes 1. Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. 2. The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. DOCUMENT STATUS(1) PRODUCT STATUS(2) DEFINITION Objective data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. DEFINITIONS Product specification ⎯ The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however, shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the Product data sheet. DISCLAIMERS Limited warranty and liability ⎯ Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory. Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors. Right to make changes ⎯ NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use ⎯ NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Applications⎯ Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their applications and products. NXP Semiconductors Legal information NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect. Limiting values ⎯ Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device. Terms and conditions of commercial sale ⎯ NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer. No offer to sell or license ⎯ Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Export control ⎯ This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from national authorities. Quick reference data ⎯ The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding. Non-automotive qualified products ⎯ Unless this data sheet expressly states that this specific NXP Semiconductors product is automotive qualified, the product is not suitable for automotive use. It is neither qualified nor tested in accordance with automotive testing or application requirements. NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for inclusion and/or use of non-automotive qualified products in automotive equipment or applications. In the event that customer uses the product for design-in and use in automotive applications to automotive specifications and standards, customer (a) shall use the product without NXP Semiconductors’ warranty of the product for such automotive applications, use and specifications, and (b) whenever customer uses the product for automotive applications beyond NXP Semiconductors’ specifications such use shall be solely at customer’s own risk, and (c) customer fully indemnifies NXP Semiconductors for any liability, damages or failed product claims resulting from customer design and use of the product for automotive applications beyond NXP